Home

SAFEPAQ-11: User manual

1. Reaction EXS b EDXS b ESouce lUse IXS b IDXS b lSouce 104 reactions Ne 20n F 18 7 50000E 03 1 50000E 03 QA78A True QA7A Ne 20 n t F 18 amp 80000E 03 1 50000E 03 QA78A True 7 50000E 03 1 50000E 03 QA78A Mag 24 n tINa 22 B S0000E 03 1 00000E 03 QA7BA True 4 30840E 03 7 97860E 04 QA78A Mg 24 n tINa 22 4 30840E 03 7 97860E 04 GA784 True _ 6 S0000E 03 1 00000E 03 QA78A AL27 nhINa 25 3 18000E 03 5 90000E 04 WU73 True 2 80240E 03 5 60480E 04 wU79 AL27 n hINa 25 2 80240E 03 5 60480E 04 wU79 Tue 3 18000E 03 5 80000E 04 wU 8 AL27 nh INa 25 2 80240E 03 5 60480E 04 WU79 True 3 18000 03 5 80000E 04 WU79 AK27Inh Na25 3 18000E 03 5 80000E 04 WU79 True 2 80240E 03 5 60480E 04 WU79 CCFE Fusion Figure 183 The Compare integral data window Clicking the Tools Compare New Integral data submenu item displays the Compare new integral data window shown in Figure 184 This shows reactions where there are new integral data in the External database The values of the integral data in the External database are shown The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 159 S amp Cmpaemewitegaldta ssi Reaction ID Use XS b DXS b Source 0 reactions Figure 184 The Compare new integral data windo
2. Confidence intervals 68 within factor 1 41 95 5 within factor 3 76 0 0010 1 9960E 01 8 2320 0 3333 4 9437E 02 4 1084 gt Factor2 0 0010 35056E 03 0 1446 e 0 1429 5 7208E 02 0 0337 Q Factor 10 0 1111 6 1635E 01 0 5212 0 2000 3 1181E 01 0 2246 0 0909 6 5973E 02 0 0838 Exclude 0 0010 1 7899E 02 0 7382 None 0 0769 2 9600E 01 0 5405 O As graph 0 1423 4 4741E 01 0 2633 0 0010 1 1263E 02 0 4645 Copy 811 reactions 0 0667 2 4477E 01 0 6080 0 0010 2 0231E 02 0 8344 0 0588 3 6097E 01 1 1621 Close Figure 148 The Reaction details window If points have been excluded in the plot then they can also be excluded from the Reaction details window Clicking the As graph option in the Exclude group and then clicking the Get reactions button shows the reduced list So long as the All reactions option is selected then two Confidence intervals are displayed In Figure 148 these show that 68 of the points are User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 136 SAFEPAQ II within a factor of 1 41 of the trend line and 95 594 are within a factor 3 76 The selected items in the grid can be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button The entire listing can be printed to the default printer by clicking the Print button The window can be closed by clicking the Close button Returning to the Analysis graph window Figure 145 clicking the Edit Copy menu item places the graph on the clipboard
3. Figure 111 The Preliminary modifications window In Table 2 a brief description of the Action of each Mod type is given followed by a specification in terms of the six fields used in each modification These are Elow Ehigh Eref Xref fact Addnum The first five are Double data types and the last is a Long The first three are typically energy values the fourth is a cross section the fifth a factor and the sixth the identification number of additional data Details of what each modification does in terms of the data points are given in Table 3 In Figure 111 values for the first five of these fields are shown in the text boxes and the Action of the modification is shown in the Mod type text box The value of the Addnum field is rarely required but it is available in a ToolTip by hovering the cursor over the Mod type text box If a Mod Type 13 data merge modification is selected then the ToolTip also shows the upper energy Emax of the data merge Selecting any of the reactions in the list box shows the values of the first five fields for the first modification in the text boxes If there is more than one modification for the reaction then the gt and lt buttons are enabled it is possible to view each of the modifications by clicking lt to move back and gt to move to the next one The selected modification can be removed by clicking the Delete Mod button Clicking the button actually inserts a Mod type 17 User
4. 13 14 15 then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 4 Remaining branching ratios at thermal energies by systematics storing a Mod type 4 Are there experimental resonance integral data for this final state and the other for a multiplicity 2 reaction If so then calculate the branching ratio and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental resonance integral data for this final state and the other two for a multiplicity 3 reaction If so then calculate the branching ratio and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental resonance integral data for two final states but not the required final state e g m and Total may be present allowing g to be calculated If so then calculate the branching ratio and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental resonance integral data for three final states but not the required final state e g g m and Total may be present allowing n to be calculated If so then calculate the branching ratio and store a Mod type 4 Remaining branching ratios in the mid range use those calculated at thermal energy Are there experimental data at 14 5 MeV for this final state and the other for a multiplicity 2 reaction if so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 6 Are there experimental data at 14 5 MeV for this final state and the other two for a multiplicity 3 reaction if so then calculate the branching ratio
5. Incoming particle neutron fa 30Ke Systematics New syst a USB Drive 3 M Ignore final Type 16 mods when making comparisons SAFEPAQ folder Safepaq 2008 1 between Int and Ext F Cross section data folder Cross section data Expand EXFOR refs Decay data folder Decay data Original EXFOR CD F Graphs folder graphs New EXFOR CD split d Serap folder inp Single EXFOR CD ENDF scientific format v Default group data type Vitamin J flat vl E S B is ange value or Rind Reader for pdf file CAP Filesx amp dobe S E lc icol Extended energy library Extra Folder Safepaq DotNet Aic Goan Sia ase Figure 1 The Settings window Figure 1 shows the Settings window the SAFEPAQ II databases are in the Extra Folder folder in this case Safepaq DotNet Note that this folder also contains all the other data folders such as Cross section data see Appendix 2 for more details The window can also be opened by clicking the File Settings menu item or the fifth toolbar button The meaning of the various check box options are explained in the relevant section later in this report but note here that if the project includes data at energy gt 20 MeV then the Extended energy library option must be checked CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 5 It is recommended that the supplied SAFEPAQ II databases remain untouched and that a new EAF project is started Figure 2 shows t
6. Powers Figure 10 The Project properties window The windows that have this feature are SAFEPAQ II Figure 2 Log Figure 6 Targets and sources Figure 67 Data visualisation Figure 68 Reaction data Figure 70 Cache contents Figure 79 Data selection Figure 82 Integral C E Figure 94 Integral C E graph Figure 97 Quality scores Figure 123 Single reaction processing Figure 124 Validation plots Figure 132 Validation plot Figure 133 Validation data Figure 134 Validation plot A Figure 135 Validation plot Q Figure 136 and REPORT Figure 138 In many of the SAFEPAQ II windows the text and list boxes are enabled for automatic drag and drop If the text is selected then it is possible to drag this to another application such as a text editor or spreadsheet for further use This feature is not mentioned for each window so the user should experiment to see if it is present As an example in Figure 11 if a nuclide is selected then dragged out of SAFEPAQ II the icon changes to a Cannot drop and then when over say a text editor it changes to a Pointer with copy icon Releasing the mouse button will place the nuclide name and source in the application SAFEPAQ II has been used to generate all the EAF 2010 libraries details of these are available in references 9 13 As can be seen in Figure 8 the current version of SAFEPAQ II is 2 0 build 3506 User manuat
7. Q EXFOR data Ag 107 n saved as n g Title NEUTRON CAPTURE CROSS SECTIONS IN THE KEV REGION Initial state Authors L W WESTON K K SETH E G BILPUCH H W NEWSON HE Institute TUSADKEJUSAORL On Reference Annals of Physics New York 10 477 1960 Monitor 47 AG 107 N G 47 AG 108 SIG 2 gas 22 points O m Daughter m 41801E402y beta 91 3 IT 8 7 18 data sets O n g 24000m Data used for plotting Total Mixed Data FS Energy eV Energy Uncert eV Data b Data Uncert b O 99 3 1000E 03 0 0000E 00 2 0500E 00 0 0000 00 99 4 0000E 03 0 0000E 00 1 8300E 00 0 0000E 00 99 4 9000E 03 0 0000E 00 1 6500E 00 0 0000E 00 88 6 0000E 03 0 0000E 00 1 5000E 00 0 0000E 00 99 8 0000E 03 0 0000E 00 1 3800E 00 0 0000 00 99 3 0000E 03 0 0000E 00 1 4800E 00 0 0000E 00 Factors 1 00E 00 1 00E 00 1 00E 00 1 00E 00 CCFE Fusion Figure 51 The EXFOR data window for a particular reaction For mixed cases it is possible that the FS entries shown in the grid are incorrect If so then use the keys 0 1 or 9 on the keyboard to edit the entry This information is saved correctly in the EXFOR database However when the data source is selected again the incorrect information from the CD ROM is displayed in the grid Select a series of rows in the grid pressing ctr1 c copies the energy and cross section data to the clipboard pressing ctr1 s copies
8. Visualisation The ability to visualise cross section data in the various source libraries and in the SAFEPAQ II databases is essential in the evaluation and selection of data for inclusion in EAF Comprehensive tools are available in SAFEPAQ II to accomplish this Clicking on the Visualisation Targets and sources menu item or the sixth toolbar button displays the Targets and sources window shown in Figure 67 o Targets and sources Target Reaction Source Fe 58 n 2n a Final Fe 59 n 2n m Fe 60 n 2n Co 55 n 3n Co 56 ndn Co 57 n g a Co 58 n g m Co 58m n g Co 53 IM np d J 45 points Final state plotting Only selected final All final states Plot BR Figure 67 The Targets and sources window This window displays the reactions present in the Cache database Cache is one of the SAFEPAQ II databases and provides a store where data from any of the source libraries or the SAFEPAQ II databases Master Final or Test can be placed for comparison and plotting Unlike the other databases where data from only a single source for any reaction can be present Cache can contain multiple copies of data for the same reaction from a variety of sources The Target nuclides present User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 48 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion in Cache are shown in the first list box selecting a target displays the reactions for that targ
9. 3 A J Koning S Hilaire and M Duijvetsijn TALYS A nuclear reaction code User Manual p 95 97 in Section 4 9 to be published 4 J Kopecky M G Delfini H A J Van der Kamp and H Gruppelaar Revisions and extensions of neutron capture cross sections in the European Activation File EAF 3 ECN C 051 July 1992 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 219 Acknowledgements The development of EAF and the production of this documentation have been supported by the United Kingdom Engineering and Sciences Research Council and the European Communities under the contract of Association between EURATOM and CCFE and were carried out within the framework of the European Fusion Development Agreement The views and opinions expressed herein do not necessarily reflect those of the European Commission The assistance of J Kopecky JUKO Research in the development and testing of SAFEPAQ II is gratefully acknowledged Disclaimer Neither the authors nor CCFE accept responsibility for consequences arising from any errors either in the present documentation the EAF libraries or in the SAFEPAQ II code Contact person Feedback on the use of EAF and SAFEPAQ II is welcomed Please contact Lee Packer with comments or in case of problems L W Packer EURATOM CCFE Fusion Association D3 1 92 Culham Science Centre Abingdon Oxfordshire OX14 3DB Tel 44 1235 466458 Fax 44 1235 466435 e mail lee pac
10. 6 e a ee te ALL MMC df ust m ted oat a tac A11 I E E5 a In E Ej 9 RU NN NN A12 m ii P a x l ente QU ait sate RON Beet eec es Perte hee erus A13 T a 4 References 1 CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics Editor R C Weast 68 Edition 1998 2 Numerical Recipes in Fortran 2 Edition W H Press S A Teukolsky W T Vetterling and B P Flannery Cambridge University Press 1992 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 212 SAFEPAQ II Appendix 4 Branching ratios CCFE Fusion An inconsistent definition of the branching ratio was used in SYMPAL This was corrected in later stages of the processing The following description shows the definition used in SAFEPAQ II If there is only a single isomeric state then the branching ratio is defined by equation 1 This branching ratio can be calculated by systematics If there is a second isomeric state then the branching ratio for this state on the assumption that it is the only one is given by equation 2 gud In SYMPAL and in early versions of SAFEPAQ II an incorrect assumption about how to form b from the other two b s had been made It was assumed that equation 3 should be used It can be easily seen that if b and b are gt 0 5 then bg will be negative Errors like this were discovered in early versions of SAFEPAQ II by the presence of negative cross sections The correct way to proceed is to assume that the ra
11. The Library summary window can be used to check what data are contained in each library but if it is required to check which libraries contain a particular reaction then it is quicker to use the Library search window shown in Figure 28 This is displayed by clicking on the Libraries Library search menu item or the nineteenth toolbar button It is possible to enter various amounts of information before making the search by clicking the Find button Note that only libraries appropriate to the type of incoming particle selected in the Settings window Figure 1 are displayed If the Target element is specified the three remaining boxes are empty then libraries containing that element as a target are displayed If the Target element and Target mass are specified the two remaining boxes are empty then libraries containing that nuclide in any isomeric state as a target are displayed If the Target element Target mass and Target state are specified the Reaction box is empty then libraries containing that nuclide as a target are displayed If all the inputs are specified then libraries containing that nuclide as a target for that reaction are displayed Note that you cannot leave gaps in the input if a reaction is specified then all the three boxes above must be filled The result of the User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 23 search process can be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button Library
12. gt aped E cae e Ll xg s ji x E0141 9 e o D pie i wo B 1E 02 I 1c 1E 03 1E 04 0 00 0 05 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 25 Asymmetry s Figure 47 The Experimental data window Clicking the Print button sends a list of all the experimental data for the selected reaction type and energy range to the default printer Clicking the Plot button displays the Experimental data window shown in Figure 47 The number of data points plotted is shown in the status bar of the main window Clicking the Options Axis scale menu item displays the Axis scale window Figure 89 where the axis ranges on the x and y axes can be changed Clicking the Options Error bars menu item toggles on and off the display of error bars for the data points It is possible to print or copy the plot to the clipboard by clicking the File Print or Edit Copy menu items respectively The window is cloded by clicking the File Close menu item EXFOR data The primary source of experimental data is EXFOR maintained by the Nuclear Data Centres The NEA Data Bank have put this on two CD ROMs and distributed them as part of the JEF PC package These CD ROMs are used by SAFEPAQ II as the source of EXFOR data The EXFOR files have been searched in the past and relevant data extracted and stored in the EXFOR mdb database User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 36 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion The SAFEPAQ II EXFOR database is u
13. 1E 04 0 00 n 2n for Final 0 05 0 10 0 15 0 20 0 25 Asymmetry s CCFE Fusion Figure 145 The Analysis graph window Nuclide Fe 56 Figure 146 The Change symbol for nuclide window Clicking the OK button will change the symbol and clicking the Close button will close the window By default the data are plotted in colour as shown in Figure 145 by clearing the tick on the Options Colour menu item data are shown in black symbols which may be more appropiate for a black and white printer If the one of the Options Distinguish something menu items is ticked then the position of the legend on the graph can be altered by selecting one of the options Top or Bottom on the Options Legend submenu The graph is Hot clicking with the mouse on one of the data points shows the identity and details of the reaction in the main window status bar The text is of the form Data for B 11 n 2n B 10 x 0 09 y 6 5973E 02 In S 2 the reactions is shown followed by the x and y values In means that the data point is included and S refers to the reaction s Quality score A trend line can be added to the graph as shown in Figure 145 by means of a least squares line of best fit Clicking the Options Trend line menu item displays or clears the line Two types of fit can be used Checking the Options Curve type Power menu item User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 133 causes the fu
14. B 10 n t Be 8 6 N 14 n zn N 13 6 0 16in p N 16 6 F 19 n 2n F 18 6 Mq 26 n a Ne z3 6 l Z7 n t Mq 25 6 OcouU0 trol Figure 155 Reaction statistics window Information about the Dominant nuclides can be obtained by clicking on the Tools FISPACT Dominant nuclides menu item which displays the Dominant nuclides window shown in Figure 156 The nuclides shown are selected by one of the Nuclides radio buttons The nuclides displayed can be from all data sources or a specific one this can be changed this by selecting one of the Original source radio buttons It is also possible to order the nuclides not just by ZA but also by the quantity AQ This quantity is a measure of the goodness of the evaluation and is the difference between two methods of calculating the Q value of the decay large values indicate nuclides that should be re evaluated Values of 100 are typical from NUBASE where no gamma lines are included in the file Clicking the Comments button shows the comment lines at the beginning of the evaluated file User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 142 SAFEPAQ II The contents of the list box can be copied to the clipboard or printed to the default printer by clicking the Copy or Print buttons respectively Clicking the Close button closes the window EE Dominant nuclides m Nuclide Orig Source Import Delta zz Duce H 3 UKPADD 6 7 2 0 00000 All He 6 UKPADD 6
15. EAF 2009_3 Internal There are no premods Figure 197 The Compare with previous EAF library window Tab 2 id Compare with previous EAF library Reaction H 1 n q H 2 H 2 n 2n H 1 H 2in q H 3 H 3 n 2n H 2 H 3 n 3n H 1 He 3 n qg He 4 He 3 n p H 3 Quantity Experiment EAF 2007 E EAF 2009_3 2009_3_1 2007_E Perea gt Thermal b Li 6 n 2na H 1 30 keV b Li 6in n d He 4 14 5 MeV b T 4000E 02 7 6050E 02 7 3767E 02 9 6997E 01 Li 6 n g Li 7 RI b Li 6 n p He 6 Li 6 n t He 4 Li 7 n 2n Li 6 Li n n a H 3 Li 7 n 2na H 2 Li 7 n n p He 6 Li 7 n qg Li 8 Li 7 n d He 6 iv Experimental and library values at various energies Close Figure 198 The Compare with previous EAF library window Tab 4 As discussed in Appendix 2 the use of linked tables in several of the databases used by SAFEPAQ II can cause problems if databases are moved to another computer To resolve such problems click on the Tools Linked tables menu item to display the Linked tables window shown in Figure 199 There are two potential problems firstly with Final and secondly with the various source databases In Figure 199 the Final radio button is clicked and clicking on the Find button CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 167 displays in the text box the current location of the linked tables in Final The list box shows all th
16. P B 2 E kT P B 2 E kT with B 2 39 Equation 39 is only valid for B gt 2 in order to extend the range to more negative vales of B equation 37 can be integrated by parts K is defined by equation 40 and F Ej E2 by equation 41 I E tls pete AR CE E Y ded teta Sys tas aS aeo es 40 CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 205 1 B n F E1 E2 lee exp E AT Ep expC E kT Then K can be written in several forms as shown in equations 42 44 following integration by parts K K 2 1 2 E SN HQUUP qued pedem 42 F K K F A i M aa 43 L7 KT B 2 kT B 2 B 3 en KRt S 7 44 es kT B 2 kT B 2 B 3 kT 3 B 2 B 3 B 4 K can be written in terms of gamma functions in a similar fashion to equation 39 as shown in equation 45 K E E5 KT P F B e n D P B n 41 Ej kT P B n 1 E kT with B gt n For more negative values of B a quadratic fit as described in the following section is used Fission spectrum weighting Using equation 6 for the weighting leads to extremely complicated integrals Over the energy range of interest it is possible to very accurately fit the weighting function to a simple quadratic function shown in 46 The constants are found by fitting to the original function Using this and each interpolation law in term yields the following expressions for the multi group cr
17. Reference Mollendorff U v and Giese H EFF DOC 728 2000 supplied by U von Mollendorff at FZK for integral exps Add Close Figure 85 The Neutron spectra window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 66 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion A neutron spectrum can be plotted by selecting it in Figure 85 and then clicking the Plot button This displays the Plot spectrum window shown in Figure 87 This gives three options for plotting showing the neutrons per energy group per energy interval or per lethargy interval The spectrum can be scaled by a factor entered in the text box this is useful if it is required to compare two spectra with very different normalisations Select one of the radio buttons and then click the Plot button to display the Neutron spectrum window shown in Figure 88 Add spectrum Name Cf252 flux 1 Type TRIPOLI flat v Description CF 252 spectrum supplied by Mannhart File ASafepaq DotNet ascilNcf252 flux 1 asc Leg Reference MANOT1 Mannhart W and D Schmidt manoi x ND2001 Tsukuba Japan October 2001 Close Figure 86 The Add spectrum window The menu bar in Figure 88 allows the plot to be printed to the default printer by clicking the File Print menu item and copied to the clipboard by clicking the Edit Copy menu item It is possible to compare two spectra by plotting them on the same graph To do this a spec
18. 2 3 1 2 B 1 B 2 t B43 4 ps Nu l e al where B 2 1 RU o9 A 53 e f In w E Mp C B l1 pB p B 2 e4 oe pee vine E eee Bri B 2 Velocity exponential fusion Equation 7 can be rewritten in a simpler form as shown in equation 54 where g SJE JkT and a 5 kT Using equation 54 for the weighting and each interpolation law in term yields the following expressions for the multi group cross section integral J E Cg exp aE i E PEE E E plecti eise ci osds 54 Law1 E J E E3 Cg o f exp ah dE aE aE bok 55 By changing the variable E z equation 55 can be written as equation 56 JE J E E gt 2 g e xp WIG EN 56 Using the integral shown in equation 28 this integral can be evaluated as shown in equation 57 Jm sce Er SATZ siiis 57 Law 2 E JC E Gg A BE exp aE dE E _ 58 1 2 1 2 E 1 2 2CgAI EV E 5 KT CgB E exp aE Y dE E Changing the variable as in Law 1 enables the second integral to be written in standard form yielding equation 59 J E E5 2CgAI EV EY 5 kT 5 2CgBI Ej EY 5 KT 59 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 208 SAFEPAQ II Law3 2 1 2 J E E Cg f A B In E exp aE Y dE 1 60 E 2CgAI Ej EY S kT CgB f In E exp aE dE 1 Defining the integral in the second term in equation 60 as shown in equation
19. Double 8 ELIS Number Double 8 SPI Number Single 4 PAR Number Integer 2 NucSummary Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 Isom Number Integer 2 Target Yes No 1 Source Text 50 PreModAdhocAdd Name Type Size Mod number Number Long 4 Reaction number Number Long 4 PreModAdhocDel Name Type Size Mod number Number Long 4 Reaction number Number Long 4 Mod type Number Integer 2 E low Number Double 8 E high Number Double 8 E ref Number Double 8 X ref Number Double 8 factor Number Double 8 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 187 PreModification Name Type Size Mod number Number Long 4 Mod type Number Integer 2 E low Number Double 8 E high Number Double 8 E ref Number Double 8 X ref Number Double 8 factor Number Double 8 Add number Number Long 4 Exp number Number Long 4 Kind Number Byte 1 Comment Text 50 PreModSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Number Mods Number Integer 2 Mod 1 Number Long 4 Mod 2 Number Long 4 Mod 3 Number Long 4 Mod 4 Number Long 4 Mod 5 Number Long 4 Mod 6 Number Long 4 Mod 7 Number Long 4 Mod 8 Number Long 4 Mod 9 Number Long 4 Mod 10 Number Long 4 ReacSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 Multiplicity Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Source Text 50 Status Numbe
20. Law 2 Using equation 5 for the weighting and each interpolation law in term yields the following expressions for the multi group cross section integral J JG E Co f E expt E kT dE mo 31 Using the standard result shown in equation Al and using I E 5 defined by equation 28 the final expression is given in 32 J E E5 Coil E E MKT e 32 E J E E gt cf A BE E exp E kT dE User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 204 SAFEPAQ II Law 3 J G E gt e 4 BIn E E exp E kT dE CAI GA E kT CBE T I E1 Ey VKT 34 CBk r ewo cjr EHD Jr kT A Law 4 FEE ymo n Ee exp E kT dE Ce E E exp 0e 35 Defining a new variable such thate 1 KTB E means that 35 can be written as 36 Ce4 1 kTB E J E E gt e expl e KT de 1 2 1 kTB ae p d ___ Ce I Q kTB E 1 KTB E VKT where B 1 kT 36 1 kTB IEEE Ce 03 E2 where B 1 kT Law 5 JE Ey Qe gts exp E kT dE osuncice detis 37 Note that in equation 37 B is not generally an integer and the solution for non integer B involves incomplete gamma functions The solution for integral B is given in equation 38 for the general case the solution using gamma functions is shown in equation 39 TCE SE N Ce T SUE SE ed ET y ensani 38 Equation 37 can be written as equation 39 using equation A13 J E E5 Ce kT F B 2
21. SAFEPAQ II surround it in a Chart of the Nuclides plot Clicking one of these makes that nuclide the current one displaying data for it Clicking the Chain button displays the Decay Chain window shown in Figure 22 the nuclide name is placed in the title bar of the window Clicking the Draw menu item displays the chains by default with no half life information in black and white Clicking the Options Colour menu item shows the arrows in the colours appropriate for the decay mode the key colours in Figure 21 while clicking the Options Show half life menu item includes the nuclide half lives as shown in Figure 22 The Options Font and Options Size menu items allow the size 6 8 10 points and font type Courier or Times to be used to display the chains Clicking the Print menu item sends the displayed decay chain to the default printer while the Close menu item closes the window If the length of the chains is such that not all the nuclides are visible in the window then the window can be resized m G5 Decay Chain Pb 210 Pb 210 2 2E 01 y Draw Print Copy Options Close m 99 99 0 00 Bi 210 5 0E 00 d EN gt Po 210 1 4E 02 d Pb 206 Stable 0 00 T1 206 4 2E 00 m 5 Pb 206 Stable o Hg 206 8 2E 00 m 95 T1 206 4 2E 00 m 5 Pb 206 Stable
22. XXXnn format in positions 1 5 Line 3 contains the data headers note that units must be given these can only be eV MeV b or mb The data can be in two columns Energy and Xsect or three columns Energy Xsect and D Xsect Following lines show the data points is standard scientific notation The next data set then follows with no blank line separating the data XY table file format One of the options for the format of the source data files is XY table see the Library options window Figure 24 The format of the file is illustrated below 18039 0 102 99 2 49 2 00000E 00 3 84000E 01 4 60000E 00 1 75000E 01 1 00000E 01 8 30000E 00 1 50000E 01 5 58000E 00 2 20000E 01 3 84000E 00 Line 1 contains the ZA identifier of the target in positions 1 6 and the initial state of the target 0 1 2 in postion 9 Line 2 contains the reaction MT number in positions 4 6 and the daughter final state 0 1 2 99 in positions 8 9 Line 3 contains the interpolation law only one law is possible in position 6 Line 4 contains the number of data points in positions 3 6 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 199 Scrap file format XML files Following lines show the data points energy cross section in standard scientific notation The data must be in the format shown 5 decimal places starting in columns 1 and 13 Data scraps are held in a very similar file format to the XY table ho
23. c ando Law 1 constant ERU ESO ets id atte cama ated E aid ri e oou 8 Law 2 linear linear c E 0 221 E E A BE ise 9 2 1 o E o E 05 0 a a a 10 E E E E Law 3 log linear 05 01 o E ai In E InCE A BIn E 11 se In 5 In Ej CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 201 ZEE QC AE Rr NEL i RN 12 In E In E E CES CE gt A Law 4 linear log inte Cy Since UE pee agp Pa Id OE oe 13 gt o E efe sas decal scat chic tahcatial vente mouse tgeaieon eo Reanstoomamaginedons 14 ss pecs wea Eg ING BY pes OUD me 15 E E E E Law 5 log log In c5 In o In c In o In 5 In Ej In E In E A BIn E 16 Snol Lae E n dh ste DC ad t dri de oiu 17 zr In c In 5 In o5 In j B lg ED or 18 In 5 In 4 In 5 In Ei Flat weighting Using equation 3 for the weighting and each interpolation law in term yields the following expressions for the multi group cross section integral J eue cya Law1 Ej JE E 7 Co TOI Do TRE 19 Law 2 E H Es cl A BE dE CA E E CB E2 E 66 C o o3 XE Ej Law 3 E E J E E C 4 BIn E dE CACE E CB E In E E Gy E3 C 4 B I E an EIEE 44 C A B E E CB E In E E In E User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 202 SAFE
24. developed These are held in a new database compare mdb Actually there is a database comp generic mdb that contains all the queries but no tables When it is necessary to compare the Internal and External databases a new version of Compare is produced which contains links to tables in the Internal and External databases This is done by clicking on the Tools Create Compare database menu item which displays the Create Compare database window shown in Figure 175 Note that the current External folder is shown and so this window can be used if the location of the External folder is required for other purposes Another option is to use the Project properties window Figure 10 Create Compare database Current External folder Safepaq DotNetSafepaq 2007 news External folder Safepaq DotNetNSafepaq 2009 2 E Figure 175 The Create Compare database window Clicking the browse button displays the standard Browse For Folder dialog where the folder containing the External databases can be selected Clicking the Create button copies comp generic mdb to compare mdb and links all the required tables If Compare already exists then a confirmation dialog is displayed Once the Compare database has been created in the current SAFEPAQ folder a set of menu items on the Tools menu become enabled These enable a series of comparisons to be carried out Clicking the Tools Compare Reaction sources submenu item di
25. l Name Reaction number Point number Energy Cross section Name Reaction number Range number Range limit Interpolation law Name Reaction number Source ZA target target ZA daughter daughter Multiplicity Source daughter Source Multiplicity MT QM Ql Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Integer Type Number Long Text Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Double Number Double Number Integer Number Integer Number Long Type Number Long Number Long Number Integer Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Integer Type Number Long Text Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Double Number Double Size Size atk o BNHONAWAADNNNNNAN SA Size Size 0 COHN HN ROSE NS Or User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II Target 8 The definition of the final mdb database tables Adjacent cross section Cross section Group 069 Link Group 069 Source Group 100 Link Group 100 Source Group 172F Link Group 172F Source LR NR NP Hi
26. n 3nt4 n 3nt n 4nd n 5np 212 213 n 4nt n 4nt n 5nd n 6np n 5nt n 5nt n 6nd n 7np 214 n h _ n h n pd n n2p 215 n a n a n n h n pt n n pd n 2n2p 216 njn a n n a n 2nh n dt n n pt n 3n2p 217 n 2nat n 2no n 3nh n n dt n 4n2p 218 n 3nat n 3no n 4nh n 5n2p 219 noc n pa n dh n n ph 220 n dat n da n n pa n n dh 221 n ta n ta n n da n n th n 2npa 222 n n tat n n to n 3npa 223 n n 2a n n 20 n 3n2pa 224 n t2a n t20 n n d2a 225 n ph n ph n n 3p If data in the Cache from one of the source libraries are required in the EAF library but the reaction is currently not in Master then it is possible to add the reaction which will both add the Reaction details in Parameter and copy the data to Master by clicking the File Add to Master menu item If the reaction is already in Master but the source of data needs to be changed then this can be done by clicking the File Replace in Master menu item A similar replacement can be made in the Final database by clicking the File Replace in Final menu item Prior to changes being made confirmation dialogs similar to Figure 81 are displayed If the selected reaction is from Master then
27. this click the Reaction data Test Final for Wrong energy order for points 1 and 2 submenu item this displays the Wrong energy order for points 1 and 2 window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 110 SAFEPAQ II The twentieth test shows if any reactions have a very sharp discontinuity in cross section as the energy increases Such a steep gradient can cause problems when the group cross sections are calculated To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Very steep gradient submenu item this displays the Reactions with very steep gradient window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The twenty first test shows if any reactions have an incorrect multiplicity value A similar test was carried out in Parameter see Figure 109 but problems may occur during the generation of Final To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Incorrect multiplicity submenu item this displays the Reactions with incorrect multiplicity window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption Table 4 EAF 2010 Quality scores Score Description No experimental data exists Limited differential data which disagrees with the library weak disagreement Limited differential data which agrees with the library weak agreement Differential data which disagrees with the library strong disagreement Differential data which agrees with th
28. 00 Although such a format cannot be read by a standard FORTRAN format statement there are special routines to do it This option is set by ticking the ENDF scientific format check box in the Settings window Figure 1 Clicking the Reaction data Write EAF files Write EAF UN file submenu item creates the file eaf un in the folder cross section on the Source database disk and Cross section data folder specified in the Settings window Figure 1 this takes about 6 minutes Some additional information on reaction properties can be found on the Tools menu Clicking the Tools Final uncertainties menu item displays the Final uncertainties User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 128 SAFEPAQ II window shown in Figure 142 Choose a reaction type from the dropdown list and the unceratinty information in the final database for each reaction is shown in the grid The selected reactions can be copied to the clipboard or printed to the default printer by clicking the Copy or Print buttons respectively The window can be closed by clicking the Close button 5 Final uncertainties oles Reaction n a v Reaction b H 1 n g H 2 H 2 n g H 3 He 3 n g He 4 Li B n g Li 7 Li 7 n g Li 8 Be n g Be 8 Be 3 n g Be 10 Be 1 n g Be 11 B 10 n g B 11 B 11 n g B 12 C 12 n g C 13 CCFE Fusion 1064 reactions EV EH Delta DeltaH Delta20 Delta60 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 05 20000E 01 1 0000E 01 20000E 01 20000E 0
29. 10 59 O 010 x1 00 Factor 1 82124E 0 x100 x100 Figure 71 The Scale tab of the Reaction data window la jw jm jm je Reference energy 1 467 ev New cross section 1 0E 2 b Figure 72 The Renormalise tab of the Reaction data window li ir EU ps le Select points from 0 5 eV to 100 keV Present RI 1 220607E 19 b Required RI 20F 19 b Figure 73 The Resonance integral tab of the Reaction data window User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 55 4a lit E bs W e File name V 50n p low Interpolation law 5 Figure 74 The Save tab of the Reaction data window Li e JE be File name u Adjust To Fit V 4Bnh HighE None V 48n na HighE V 48n np d HighE O AtLowE V 48n p HighE O At High E V 48n t HighE At Both E W 185 ng LowE Figure 75 The Load tab of the Reaction data window The Scale tab Figure 71 enables a scale factor to be chosen by selecting a range radio button and dragging the slider The resultant factor is shown in the text box Select the data points that this modification should apply to and the View button becomes enabled Clicking this will plot the modified data If this is not correct then clicking the Revert button will plot the original data If the change is useful then it can be saved as a modification for the reaction by clicking the Save button The Renormalise tab Figure 72 enables a new cross secti
30. 34 Selecting a target shows which reactions have data and selecting a reaction displays the available data in the grid In addition to the energy cross section and uncertainty displayed in the first three columns the last three columns show three flags These indicate whether the data are used for calculating branching modifications Use B for calculating renormalisation modifications Use R and in validation Use V The source of the data is indicated by a reference where this is known Clicking the Modify button will display the selected data in editing boxes below the reference Changes to the data values or the flags can then be made and saved to the database by clicking the Save button A new data point can be added by clicking the Add button This displays the dialog shown in Figure 31 asking if the new data point is for the selected target and reaction If the Yes button is clicked then the editing boxes used in the modification process are used If the No button is clicked then the Add 14 5 MeV experimental data window very similar to that shown in Figure 32 is displayed Note that the flags must be chosen so that either none or only a single data point is used for branching renormalisation or validation However if duplicates are present then the last entered Yes value is retained any existing Yes is automatically changed to No At this energy there are typically many reactions on a target and several data points
31. 6 Yes No 1 MF2 Yes No 1 MF4 Yes No 1 MF32 Yes No 1 MF33 Yes No 1 1 material per file Yes No 1 Header Yes No 1 FEND Yes No 1 MEND Yes No 1 TEND Yes No 1 IEAF Yes No 1 MF6 Yes No 1 IPType Text 10 Derived Yes No 1 ANITA Yes No 1 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 180 SAFEPAQ II Reaction Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source Text 50 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 Multiplicity Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 QM Number Double 8 QI Number Double 8 LR Number Integer 2 NR Number Integer 2 NP Number Long 4 Source Name Type Size Source ID Number Integer 2 Source Text 50 Number targets Number reactions Number n Number 2n Number 3n Number f Number na Number 2na Number np Number n2a Number nd Number nt Number nh Number 4n Number 2np Number g Number p Number d Number t Number h Number a Number 2a Number 2p Number Integer Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long Number Long 5 The definition of the parameter mdb database tables A2 IAEA AdditionalData Analysis Fits CCFE Fusion Name Isom A2 Name Add
32. 61 K E E f In E exp aE Y dE 61 1 2 E PU aL JAL e enero Changing the variable as in Law 1 carrying out integration by d 2 parts and noting that zre enables equation 61 to be Z Z written as equation 62 K i aet He e l ILE LE 62 a a z Changing the variable back to E equation 62 can be written in standard form in equation 63 E 1 2 ECCE HJ EV EY ua 63 a a a Law 4 Law 5 CCFE Fusion a E E E JC Ey Cge f ePE exp aE Y dE ce exp BE aE HE 64 E E Equation 64 can be solved in terms of Error functions a 0 but B can be either positive or negative meaning that the Imaginary error function would be required It would be more practical to use a quadratic fit to the weighting spectrum this yields equation 65 which has been solved in equation 51 in section 6 4 JG E e eM BE OVE SE CLosoeenutenvei oct 65 1 J E E Cge L E exp aE dE xcuud aute teet 66 Changing the variable as in section 7 1 enables equation 66 to be written as equation 67 E J E E5 2Cge gie z User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 209 If 28 1 is an integer then equation 67 can be solved by equation 68 otherwise it is the same form as equation 37 which was solved using gamma functions The solution is given in equation 69 Tg E ye2Use Dau my esl Eos canit teen 68 2B 2 kT S
33. As the pre modification types are considered a tick or a cross is displayed next to the pre modification description to indicate if it been found Other pre modifications specifically a Data merge can be entered by clicking the Add pre mod button This displays the Add Preliminary modification window shown in Figure 112 Note that the Target Reaction and Final state details are already entered When carrying out a Data merge the value of Ey is inserted in the Ref energy text box In cases where the reaction is split this value should be slightly increased to avoid problems Click the Delete pre mod button to show a series of Confirmation dialogs enabling each pre modification to be deleted in turn Click the Change Final button to implement these pre modifications in Final Click the Change Adjacent User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 114 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion button to change the data in the Adjacent cross section table for the reaction Note that there is a major distinction between clicking the Delete and the Delete pre mod buttons The former removes all the pre modification for the reactions while the latter actually adds a Mod type 17 modification to the existing pre mods The reason for this is that pre modifications generated automatically can be removed Removal of a pre modification by the use of a Mod type 17 pre modification is also stored and can be reused in the next EAF project see discuss
34. B Yes No 1 Use R Yes No 1 SystematicsSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Cross section 14MeV Number Double 8 Systematics Number Double 8 Systematics alt Number Double 8 Systematics20Summary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Cross section 20MeV Number Double 8 Systematics Number Double 8 Systematics30Summary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 189 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Cross section 30keV Number Double 8 Systematics Number Double 8 TotalFinalSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Cross section thermal Number Double 8 Cross section 30keV Number Double 8 Cross section 14MeV Number Double 8 Resonance Integral Number Double 8 Cross section 40MeV Number Double 8 TotalFinalUncert Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Group number Number Long 4 Energy Number Double 8 DeltaSquared Number Double 8 TotalReacSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number I
35. Close Figure 17 The Known A2 data window The clearance data in the Clearance IAEA table can be viewed and altered by clicking the Decay data Known clearance data menu item This displays the Known clearance data window shown in Figure 18 Selecting a nuclide from the dropdown list displays its clearance level value The default unit for the clearance level is Bakg However by clicking the button data are displayed and entered as Bag Note that this button acts as a toggle and pressing it again will revert to the default unit Data for a new nuclide can be entered by clicking the Add button which causes the two text boxes to be blank with a white background ready for data entry Click the Save button to save the new data or the Cancel button in the same place as the Close button to remove the new data Data values can be changed by selecting the nuclide and clicking the Modify button this makes the background of the final text box white and enables the Save button Data for a nuclide can be removed by clicking the Delete button Prior to any data changes being made a confirmation dialog is displayed Q Known clearance data Nuclide H3 w Add Clearance level 1 00E 05 Baka t Source IAEA Safety Guide RS G 1 7 2004 Figure 18 The Known clearance data window Information on the spins of the ground state and isomers should be available when producing the cross section l
36. External database contains these modifications Clicking the Tools Compare Pre modifications submenu item displays the Compare pre modifications window shown in Figure 187 Prior to the window appearing the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 188 is displayed This ensures that the comparison is being carried out between databases with the same reaction numbers The window shows reactions where there are differences in the pre modifications stored and that will be used to create Final The values in External are shown The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 161 B Compare pre modifications m o 456 462 588 588 588 642 662 706 Reaction Modtype Elow Ehigh Eref Xref fact 35 reactions 113 13 2 7 3 3 1 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 2 0000E 07 2 5000E 01 2 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 2 0000E 07 2 6000E 01 2 0000E 00 1 0000E 06 6 0000E 07 1 4500E 07 1 1345E 03 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 O 0000E O0 4 2465E 06 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 1 0000E 06 5 0000E 07 1 4500E 07 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 O 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 5 5893E 06 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 1 0000E 06 6 0000E 07 1 4500E 07 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 D 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 5 0232E 02 O 0000E 00 1 0000E 08 v Close Figure 187 The Compare pre modifications window Compa
37. Figure A2 1 shows a case with the Extra folder Source database disk E SAFEPAQ database disk E Safepaq DotNet ascii Cross section data Decay data Documents Exfor Graphs New Safepaq Scraps Linked tables CCFE Fusion Fig A2 1 Disk structure with extra folder In all cases the default location of the safepaq2 exe file is on the Base disk C in the folder Programe Files safepaq2 As the SAFEPAQ II application has become more sophisticated and the sizes of the EAF projects have increased there are several cases where the databases contain linked tables This can be a problem when transferring projects between various computers The reason is that the location of a linked table is specified in terms of the path on the computer where the link was created if the database is then moved or copied to another disk the link may no longer be valid causing a crash of SAFEPAQ II Although a tool Linked Table Manager exists in Access to deal with such problems it can only be used if the version of the database is the same as the version of Access Since in many cases these are different it is necessary to consider this problem within SAFEPAQ II The linked tables within compare mdb can be dealt with by recreating the database on the new computer and it is User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 197 X4s file format recommended that this be done as soon as SAFEPAQ II is opened with a new
38. If the Visualisation Extended plots multiple targets menu item in the main window Figure 2 is checked then when a reaction is selected in the the Targets and sources window Figure 67 then all targets to a maximum of nine starting with the one selected for that element are plotted It is the user s User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 66 SAFEPAQ II responsibility to ensure that the reactions for the various targets exist in the Cache and that in the case of split reactions they have been summed An example of such a plot for x p reactions on Sn is shown in Figure 84 W 184 n xn extended 258400 20E 00 2 c 15800 9 B 5 02 o ni o 1 0E 00 O Energy eV Figure 83 Plot of W n xn cross sections produced using the Extended plot option Sn n p extended c ix 9 E o oO o E P o e O 0 0E 00 0 0E 00 1 0E 07 it pe ttt 208407 deae ce eec ee ee neck en m eee E 40E 07 50E 07 amp 60E 07 Energy eV Figure 84 Plot of Sn n p cross sections produced using the Extended plot multiple targets option CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 67 Integral data Measurements can be made in a neutron spectrum rather than at a particular neutron energy to give an average cross section In order to use such integral measurements to improve the data library it is necessary to be able to average the library data in well defi
39. Include button so allowing the reaction to be included again in the analysis In the Validation plot window Figure 133 the list of excluded reactions can be managed by clicking the Options Include all reactions menu item to remove all entries from the file by clicking the Options Save excluded reactions menu item to save to the file the current selection and by clicking Options Load excluded reactions menu item to load from the file the saved selection In Figure 133 it is possible to print or copy the plot to the clipboard by clicking the File Print or Edit Copy menu items respectively Returning to Figure 132 the second type of plot that of C E or C S as a function of target mass A can be made by selecting the x y plot x axis Mass A radio button Select the other options as in the case of a histogram then click the Plot button to display the Validation plot A window shown in Figure 135 Figure 135 shows the C E data plotted as a function of atomic mass In order to identify the various points click on one to see details presented in the status bar of the main window It is possible to print or copy the plot to the clipboard by clicking the File Print or Edit Copy menu items respectively The appearance of the graph can be altered clicking the Options Y axis menu item displays a submenu with five entries allowing the y axis range to be selected In Figure 135 the option E 1 E1 has been checked Clicking the Options X axi
40. L 3 us auia bene Sa anche cae ess ntl tedv ia diio easidase E Rb udxtoqn ics o ae SEA Tess rd aE 206 Dad cato cect as E Gee oec os d A DM SM I AME Gaal 206 Law OD uec a e bte at d tal Ra See aT d teorici ete ses 206 Velocity exponential TUSIOD rieoioo oorr aeo eo Yr Pt ar e tta po oran oro as bb dvo bx Ve ao beu YE vv os apta EE 207 L3 Danses seite stacceem es tio ccs Lb c A IDE 207 Er o T pn 207 I Scc conc he Rael ia art MEE UE BA IO A UC ML AM ELLE 208 Law vL acie etat ntu i ee E GM od hos eit oe ite i iren dots 208 E gos eR 208 Mirnlirdg DC cc 210 Annex Standard integrals eeeee eee eee eee ee eee teen ee eee se etta se tese se tete setae 210 Appendix 4 Branching ratios eee eee ee eee ee ette eene eene eene nen 212 Appendix 5 Single Resonance Approximation eese 214 Appendix 6 Low Energy Approximation eee ecce ee eene 216 TORHOWIedeentents nio scdan odes GT Nen veas E GERA 219 Diselaitet ARMEN Lc 219 Contact DOTSOW m 219 SAFEPAQ II 1 Introduction The European Activation System EASY is the complete package of data inventory code and processing system for activation calculations that is maintained by the Euratom CCFE Fusion Association at Culham Science Centre Maintenance of the EAF nuclear data libraries is a complex procedure the cross section files need to be evaluated including choosing from several sources and ad
41. Options 5 80E 1 7 4 82E 1 3 83E 1 2 85E 1 1 87E 1 8 83E 2 1 00E 2 Fe 56 n p Systematics KTO90 UE 0 00E 0 1 1 40E 7 2 80E 7 4 20E 7 5 60E 7 7 00E 7 Energy eV BEDNOUIDOOSUONDOSEBNUOSBSUOONDOSEONOUDOOSOBLUE 2 n 6 m gt m to w Figure 60 The EXFOR master plot window User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 44 SAFEPAQ II The EXFOR lab codes can be viewed by clicking the EXFOR EXFOR lab codes menu item that displays the EXFOR lab codes window shown in Figure 64 Select the required country and the available lab codes and details are displayed in the grid When the EXFOR sources window Figure 49 is opened any private sources available for the selected reaction are appended to the end of the standard EXFOR sources Note that 1f the data are stored in the SAFEPAQ II EXFOR database then the symbol amp is used rather than Private data are not shown in the EXFOR index window Figure 50 Clicking the Data button in Figure 49 when a private source is selected displays the EXFOR data window shown in Figure 51 The private data are displayed as normal but note that the View file button is disabled If the data are required to be stored in the SAFEPAQ II EXFOR database then check the Data used for plotting option and click the Save button The private data are displayed in plots Figure 59 and Figure 60 in the same way as t
42. Plotted points submenu shows a series of options By default Options Plotted points All is checked and all the points are shown If Options Plotted points Not excluded is checked then any of the options listed below that are checked are not plotted Checking Options Plotted points Exclude actinides ensures that all reactions where the target has Z gt 85 are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude A 20 ensures that all reactions where the target has A lt 20 are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude A 40 ensures that all reactions where the target has A lt 40 are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Z even ensures that all reactions where the target has even values of Z are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Z odd ensures that all reactions where the target has odd values of Z are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Scores 0 ensures that all reactions that have a Quality Score of 0 are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Scores gt 0 ensures that all reactions that have a Quality Score gt 0 are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Unimportant ensures that all reactions that are not in the list of important reactions are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Important ensures that all reactions that are in the list of important reactions are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Non threshold ensures that all reactions that
43. SAFEPAQ CII can be closed down by clicking the File Exit menu item More information about the project can be found by clicking the File Project properties menu item This displays the Project properties window shown in Figure 10 Details of the Trend coefficients are given on page 132 The information shown in the Settings window Figure 1 is stored in a settings file in xml format details of the various settings files are given in Appendix 2 This file is read when SAFEPAQ II is restarted so that the status is restored In addition the location of the more commonly used windows on the desktop is stored when the window is closed and then used to position the window when it is reopened User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 1l T Project properties Project name EAF 2008 1 Incoming particle Neutron Upper energy 60 MeV Project location Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq_2009_ 14 Final link I Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq_2009_1 final_add mdb External folder I Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq 2009 User name R Forrest Saved xs max Trend coefficients n2n Leg amp Logs C Power amp Power s n3 Leg amp Logs C Power Powers n4n Leg amp Logs Power amp 7 Powers np Leg amp Logs Power Power s nd C Log Logs Power amp 7 Powers nt Leg Logs C Power Power s n h C Log Logs C PowerA Powers na C Log C Logs C Power amp
44. and proton libraries it is common to start with a reaction list for neutron induced reactions When the incoming particle in the list is changed form n to say d then many of the reactions in the list will be elastic reactions such as d d where the daughter is not an isomeric state These reactions can be removed from the list by clicking the Reaction data Delete elastic reactions menu item Reading the Log and checking on errors often requires that the reaction number in the Final database be identified This is possible by clicking on the Reaction data Reaction numbers menu item that displays the Reaction numbers window shown in Figure 106 Enter the reaction number in the text box click the Get details button and the reaction and source are shown Reaction numbers Reaction number in Final 56430 Get detail Reaction Te 123 n 4nd Sb 118m Source TALYS Ga Figure 106 The Reaction numbers window Clicking the Reaction data Reaction search menu item or the twenty third toolbar button displays the Reaction search window shown in Figure 107 Using this window searches can be made for particular reaction types or data sources If searching by reaction type then select the Reaction radio button and select a reaction type from the dropdown list and choose the initial and final states with the radio buttons Clicking the Get reactions button shows all reactions that fit the criteria the data source and the total number of r
45. as the default of processing all the Ad hoc modifications If the database can be used then the Process button is enabled Clicking this will add all possible Ad Hoc modifications to the Internal Parameter database Any that cannot be added are listed in the window This list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button or printed by clicking the Print button The reactions can be investigated individually and further modifications added as necessary It is possible that following the addition of Ad hoc modifications that for some reactions there may exist User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 106 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion redundant Mod type 17 modifications These should be removed and this can be done by clicking the Reaction data Find reactions with incorrect ModType 17 modifications menu item that displays the Reactions with incorrect ModType 17 modifications window which is identical to Figure 114 except that the title is different Clicking the Get reactions button lists the reactions If any reactions are shown then select one and click the View data button to open the Reaction data window Figure 70 where the data can be inspected Once the collection of modifications is complete these can be implemented by generating the Final database This is done by clicking the Reaction data Generate Final database using modifications menu item Final already contains data but these are not deleted only fur
46. at the given energy and store a Mod type 6 Are there experimental data points at 14 5 MeV for two final states but not the required final state e g m and Total may be present allowing g to be calculated If so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 6 Are there experimental data points at 14 5 MeV for three final states but not the required final state e g g m and Total may be present allowing n to be calculated If so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 6 Remaining branching ratios at 14 5 MeV by systematics storing a Mod type 6 Details about the definition of branching ratios are given in Appendix 4 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 101 Find all experimental modifications Reaction data Find modifications Find all experimental modifications carries out renormalisation to experimental data for all the reactions storing a Mod type 3 Find all systematics modifications Reaction data Find modifications Find all systematics modifications carries out renormalisation to systematic values for all the reactions storing a Mod type 2 Find all repeated zero modifications Reaction data Find modifications Find all repeated zero modifications finds reactions where there is more than one Zero cross section at the start of the data These additional points are removed using a Mod type 8 modification Find all
47. be edited by selecting a number and typing Note that typing will overwrite the existing value if you require to edit then click on the number and press the Space key A new data point can be added by selecting the data point which you require to have the new point added after and clicking the Add button The number of points increases and new values can be entered To remove a data point select the point and click the Delete button The new scrap can be saved either overwriting the existing file or by entering a new name in the text box A new scrap can be constructed by clicking File New and entering data The appearance of the graph can be altered checking the View Lin Lin axes menu item will plot using both axes linear and checking the View Log Log axes menu item will plot using both axes logarithmic The data points can be joined by checking the View Show lines menu item The selected items in the data grid can be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Edit Copy menu item The entire scrap file can be printed by clicking the File Print menu item Closing the window either by clicking the File Close or the the Close menu items without saving the changed data displays a confirmation dialog that gives the chance to save the file An example of the use of data scraps is the calculation of the capture and fission cross sections in the energy range 1 10 eV to the end of the resolved resonance region Ey This can be done using the Sin
48. be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button or printed by clicking the Print button Clicking the Close button closes the window The data source of the selected reaction is displayed as a ToolTip when the cursor hovers over the Reaction listbox This information can be included when reactions are copied or printed if the Source in Print Copy option is checked During the review of data in Final it may be necessary to follow all the above processing steps for a single reaction to improve the data This can be done by clicking the Reaction User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 112 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion data Single reaction processing menu item or the twenty seventh toolbar button which displays the Single reaction processing window shown in Figure 124 This consists of a series of tabs which divide the processing into a number of phases The window opens with the Source tab displayed Clicking on the Get reactions button will show all the targets in the first list box selecting one of these displays the reactions for the target in the second list box The selected reaction name is shown in the window s title bar Note that the Get reactions button is only enabled if the Final database has been constructed To avoid having to click the Get reactions button each time the window is opened provided that Final has been constructed the window will open with the reactions already displayed if the Auto open Sin
49. building a new EAF cross section library entail e Compiling all sources of data into separate databases with details of all these sources held in the Library database e The selection of the data source for each reaction and the creation of the Master database containing these data e Improvement of the experimental data that are used in the construction of the modifications which include branching renormalisation addition and merging of data These are stored in the Parameter database e Apply the modifications to produce the Final database e Write data from Final in the standard EAF format as text files which can be used by EASY e In order to carry out these steps there is a need to visualise data test the results of modifications and compare with experiments to iterate the processes The means to analyse the databases using the method of Statistical Analysis of Cross Sections has been implemented in recent versions of SAFEPAQ II This is rather sophisticated and now allows cross sections to be generated from the fitted trend lines In addition the importance of reactions as established by analyses with EASY 2003 and EASY 2007 can now be analysed using SAFEPAQ II In the process of the production of a new version of the EAF library many thousands of modifications need to be made These include use of new data sources changes to experimental data new nuclides new reactions and changes to cross section data Many iterations o
50. button This displays the Add nuclide window shown in Figure 13 A new nuclide its source and whether it is a cross section target are entered and the Add button is clicked to store the changes User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQM II 13 SS Add nuclide Nuclide Co 51 Ag 108m format Source JEFF 311 endf b 2 jef22 dec jef22 dec cul JEFF 311 stables Add ukpadd55 M Target Figure 13 The Add nuclide window eo ee Decay data sources m Source Header lines c CT ource culham 01 Ola cunan culham 03 of l culham 06 D Number of header lines 0 culham 93 0 culham 95 0 culhen 97 0 culham 97 0 Add source culham 98 0 endf b72 1 Change number jef22_dec 1 Figure 14 The Decay data sources window Changes to the sources can be made using the Decay data sources window shown in Figure 14 This is displayed by clicking on the Decay data Sources menu item A new source can be added by entering the name and clicking the Add source button The number of header lines for an existing source can be changed by entering the number and clicking the Change number button All the decay data sources are held in the folder specified in the Decay data folder text box in the Settings window Figure 1 in standard ENDF format In contrast to the cross section libraries these are not converted to databases The reason is that no modifications are made to the decay
51. changed so as to point to the new version of final add mdb Another problem with links also has to be avoided when a new EAF project is created This arises because when the files are copied to a new folder the new final mdb still contained links to the original final add mdb When the data in the new final mdb were removed what actually happened for the group data was that the original final add mdb was cleared This problem has been corrected and the links are automatically updated when the new project is created Private EXFOR data are held in an x4s file The format of the file is illustrated below 9 2 EO65 Energy MeV Xsect mb D Xsect mb 1 3940E 01 1 1000E 01 2 0000E 02 1 4500E 01 2 1000E 01 4 0000F 1 4920E 01 2 1000E 00 4 0000E 01 1QN VEL LE FIC je No User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 198 SAFEPAQ II 1 5350E 01 4 5000E 00 6 0000E 01 1 5890E 01 5 4000E 00 1 0000E 00 1 6500E 01 1 3000E 01 2 0000E 00 1 7060E 01 2 6000E 01 0 0000E 00 1 7490E 01 2 6000E 01 4 0000E 00 1 7980E 01 3 8000E 01 5 0000E 00 3 1 2 ITJ73 Energy MeV Xsect mb D Xsect mb 1 4000E 01 1 3000E 01 5 0000E 02 Line 1 contains the number of the data set any unique value can be used in positions 1 3 the number of points in the data set in positions 5 9 and the final state identifier 0 1 2 99 or blank 99 can be used in position 10 11 Line 2 contains the data set identifier
52. curves is at the right of the plot The Data visualisation window presents many options for the user and is probably the most complicated in the whole application It contains a menu bar a toolbar and a status bar The latter is used to present information about a data point on the graph selected by clicking with the mouse In Figure 68 one of the red data points has been clicked the status bar shows that it is Experimental data with the number of the data point its energy cross section and its final state g m n or T for total cross section also shown A shortcut method of plotting the data is to double click the required data source in the Targets and sources window Figure 67 Note that if a library with data gt 20 MeV is being used then the x axis in Figure 68 extends up to 60 MeV otherwise the limit is 20 MeV Clicking the Edit Copy menu item or the first toolbar button copies the current plot to the clipboard Clicking the File Print menu item or the second toolbar button prints the current plot User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 49 lec Data visualisation Jc File Edit Options B3 d Bl Ji E E ES PISCIS PS PLA x 8 0E 01 6 0E 01 40E 01 Cross Section b 0 0E 00 Experimental data 11 Co 59 n 2n Co 58 N Final g N Final m Final tot Experimental Data 178407 258407 338407 428407 50E 07 58E 07 Energy
53. data only a choice from various sources is made If a new source of data is available and it is required that all nuclides originally with source o d source are changed to new source then the Global source replace window shown in Figure 15 can be used This is displayed by clicking on the Decay data Global source replace menu item The old and new source names are entered in the text boxes and by clicking the Replace button the changes are made User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 14 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion re Global source replace Change all instances of old source to new source enn as the source of decay data in the Nuclide summary table Figure 15 The Global source replace window The biological hazard data in the KnownHazards table can be viewed and altered by clicking the Decay data Known hazard data menu item This displays the Known hazard data window shown in Figure 16 Selecting a nuclide from the dropdown list displays ingestion and inhalation coefficients and the source of data Data for a new nuclide can be entered by clicking the Add button which causes all four text boxes to be blank with a white background ready for data entry Click the Save button to save the new data or the Cancel button in the same place as the Close button to remove the new data Data values can be changed by selecting the nuclide and clicking the Modify button this makes the background of the
54. data points window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The twelfth test shows if any threshold reactions contain a first point with energy lt leV To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Threshold reactions with wrong st point submenu item this displays the Theshold reactions with wrong 1st point window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The thirteenth test shows if any threshold reactions contain a first range with a interpolation law that uses the log of the cross section laws 4 or 5 Since the first data point has cross section User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 109 0 such a law would cause a crash To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Threshold reactions with wrong 1st law submenu item this displays the Theshold reactions with wrong 1st law window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The fourteenth test only applies to libaries with energies gt 20 MeV For such libraries all reactions should contain data above 20 MeV To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Missing data above 20 MeV submenu item this displays the Missing data above 20 MeV window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The fifteenth test shows if any reactions have data points with energies gt 60 MeV To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Data points gt 60 MeV submenu item this displa
55. dede dede de dede dede de de de dede de dede dede de dede de dede dede de dede de cde cde cde cde ccc Ge AG x EAF 2009 3 69Gp THE EUROPEAN ACTIVATION FILE VERSION 2009 3 AUG 2009 de de de de de dede de de de dede de de de dede de de de dde de de de de dede de dede dede de dede dede de dede dede de dede dede de de de dede de dede dede de dede de de de dede de dece dede cde cde cde cce 6G 6G x ACTIVATION AND TRANSMUTATION CROSS SECTION FILE FOR USE BY THE EUROPEAN ACTIVATION SYSTEM EASY EASY DOCUMENTATION SERIES UKAEA FUS 535 THE EUROPEAN ACTIVATION FILE EAF 2007 NEUTRON INDUCED CROSS SECTION LIBRARY RA FORREST J KOPECKY AND J CH SUBLET EURATOM UKAEA FUSION ASSOCIATION CULHAM SCIENCE CENTRE ABINGDON OXFORDSHIRE OX14 3DB UNITED KINGDOM THESE GROUP CROSS SECTIONS HAVE BEEN CALCULATED AT CULHAM IN THE 69 GROUP WIMS STRUCTURE WITH A M X 1 OVER E FISSION MICRO FLUX WEIGHTING FUNCTION SESSESSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSISISISISISISSSSSSSSSSSSISSSISSISISSSSSSSSSSSISSISSISISSSSSSSSSS Group file type BS group fission weighting 175 group fusion weighting 100 aroup fusion weighting 315 group flat weighting 172 group flat weighting 315 aroup fission weighting 172 aroup fission weighting 315 group fusion weighting 172 group fusion weighting 211 aroup flat weighting 175 group flat weighting 351 aroup flat weighting lass Figure 139 The Write EAF_GXS files window Clicking
56. displays the Find in Action window shown in Figure 7 Enter the string to be found in the text box and click the Find First button The first entry containing the string in the Action column is shown at the top of the Log window Subsequent entries can be found by clicking the Find Next button Log File Edit Yiew Date_Time Action 2008 12 22 15 24 Decay data file EAF 2009 010 read into Parameter 2008 12 22 15 24 Parameter DecayData table written 2008 12 22 15 24 FISPACT file index EAF 2009 assembled and written 2008 12 22 15 24 FISPACT file A2_EAF 2009 assembled and written gt i 2008 12 22 15 25 FISPACT hazards file hazards EAF 2008 assembled and written 2008 12 22 15 25 FISPACT file ASSCFY_EAF 2009 written 2008 12 22 15 25 FISPACT file Clear EAF 2008 assembled and written 2009 01 12 15 06 w Bodel added to Users Users table FISPACT hazards file hazards EAF 2009 assembled and written Comment CCFE Fusion Figure 6 The Log window It is easy to move to the end of the Log by clicking the gt gt menu item and to the start by clicking the lt lt menu item If the View User ID as ToolTip option is checked then resting the cursor over the grid will give the User ID of the person who added the Log entry as a ToolTip User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 9 8 amp Find in Action Find 5 32 n a Figure 7 The Find in Action window The pre
57. do not have a threshold are excluded Checking Options Plotted points Exclude Threshold ensures that all reactions that have a threshold are excluded User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 135 It is possible to return to the cases where all points are plotted by clicking the Options Plotted points Reset none excluded menu item and all points can be plotted with the standard symbol by clicking the Options Plotted points Reset standard symbols menu item When the graph is redrawn the actual number of points plotted is shown in the Main window status bar Once a trend line is shown then the Options Reaction details menu item is enabled Clicking this displays the Reaction details window shown in Figure 148 The type of reaction and the data source are shown on the window title bar By default all the reactions are listed sorted by the ZA value of the target By selecting one of the gt Factor lt n gt radio buttons only a subset of the reactions significantly far from the trend line are listed Note that it is possible to sort the data by any of the column values clicking on the appropriate column heading will order the data in ascending order a second click on the heading reverses the order showing it as descending inp Reaction details n 2n for Final m B 11 C12 C13 C14 N 14 N 15 0 16 0 17 Target Asymmetry s Max XS b Factor A All reactions gt H 2 H 3 He 4 Li Be 3 Be 10
58. for a given reaction User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II N N No No No No No Yes No No Add Modify Delete v ii 14 5 MeV experimental data Targets Reactions SEF mm Energy eV Cross section b DeltaX sec b UseB UseR UseV Se45 n 2p gt 1 450000E 07 5 370000E 02 2 600000E 03 No Sc 46 n p 1 445000E 07 5 530000E 02 4 400000E 03 No Us Pe 1470000E 07 5 500000E 02 2 300000E 03 No Ti 48 n 2n 1 450000E 07 5 600000E 02 6 000000E 03 No Ti 49 n n m Ti 50 n a Debrecen Hungary Inst of Experimental Physics priv communication a Close User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 Figure 34 The 14 5 MeV experimental data window The data available for the resonance integal can be displayed by clicking on Experimental data View RI data or the thirteenth toolbar button to display the RI experimental data window shown in Figure 35 Selecting a target shows which reactions have data and selecting a reaction displays the available data in the grid In addition to the resonance integral and uncertainty displayed in the first two columns the last three columns show three flags These indicate whether the data are used for calculating branching modifications Use B for calculating renormalisation modifications Use R and in validation Use V Clicking the Modify button will display the selected data in editing boxes below the r
59. given by equation 2 where is the energy of the ith point User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 200 SAFEPAQ II 1 n l Eis e pol POV VIE RN HR 2 By the use of one of the five standard interpolation laws o E is expressible as an analytical formula and is one of five standard formulae The five standard forms of weighting function are shown in equations 3 7 CUE C TBlatsvergt Bio ote deo ese eroe c eet Nard NR vi Ron 3 QUE NES UY ioites entera mter asbl sad avo teqi diete dits era 4 E CE exp E XT Maxwellian thermal weighting 5 E CVE exp E T Fission spectrum weighting sss 6 QE Cexpl sj KT VE y E Velocity exponential fusion weighting 7 In these equations C is a constant kT 0 0253 eV KT 1 4 MeV in 6 kT 0 025 MeV in 7 and Ey 14 07 MeV The problem of calculating the 25 expressions resulting from using these weighting functions and interpolation laws yields simple analytical expressions in most cases However for the fission spectrum weighting some of the analytical expressions are very complicated involving Error and Hypergeometric functions and it is be preferable to replace equation 6 by a quadratic function that fits 6 extremely well Interpolation laws Expressions for the form of the cross section are given in terms of the energies E and gt and cross sections
60. in Figure 108 r np Check sources in reaction list B reactions with no data in source library Ir 194n n a Re 191 ADL 3 Ir 194n n h Re 192 ADL 3 Ir 194n n 2p Re 193 ADL 3 Ir 194n n n p 0s 193 aDL 3 Ir 194n n d 0s 193 ADL 3 Ir 194n n p 0s 194 ADL 3 Delete all Copy Close Figure 108 The Check sources in reaction list window Click the Get reactions button to display a list of reactions for which the specified data source actually contains no data The list can be printed out by clicking the Print button and placed on the clipboard by clicking the Copy button During the production of the EAF 2007 proton induced library there was only a single data source Therefore all reactions listed needed to be removed from the reaction list In such a case all the listed reactions can be removed by clicking on the Delete all button A second check that can be carried out is to check that all the reactions have daughters that are also defined in the list of nuclides Problems may occur with reactions having isomeric daughter states not defined in the nuclide list Clicking the Reaction data Check Daughters in reaction list menu item displays the Check daughters in reaction list window which is identical to Figure 108 except that the text reads reactions with no decay data for daughters A third check that can be carried out is to check that all the multiplicities are correct Clicking the Rea
61. list box then it is possible to correct them by clicking on the Reaction data Remove repeated energy points from Final menu item This step is described later The ninth test shows if any reactions contain inconsistent interpolation ranges It is possible that the number of interpolation ranges for a reaction shown in the Reaction and Interpolation tables of Final may not agree To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Inconsistent Interpolation ranges submenu item this displays the Reactions with inconsistent Interpolation ranges window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The tenth test shows if any reactions contain inconsistent cross section data It is possible that the number of data points for a reaction shown in the Reaction and Cross section tables of Final may not agree To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Inconsistent Cross section data sub menu item this displays the Reactions with inconsistent Cross section data window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The eleventh test shows if any reactions contain inconsistent numbers of data points It is possible that the number of data points or ranges for a reaction shown in the Reaction Cross section and Interpolation tables of Final may not agree To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Inconsistent number of data points submenu item this displays the Reactions with inconsistent number of
62. manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 89 modification for the reaction The reason is that this Ad hoc deletion is stored and can be redone automatically for a future library There may be times when the pre modification needs to be removed completely and this can be done by clicking the Delete Mod button with the snift key pressed A new modification can be added by clicking the Add Mod button which displays the Add Preliminary modification window shown in Figure 112 Note that if the shift key is pressed while clicking the Add Mod button then the details of the currently selected reaction are added to Figure 112 i Add Preliminary modification Target 0 18 Ag 108m format Reaction n a vl Daughter state Og Om On Total Mod type Add Pre equilibrium Low energy 1 00000E 06 eV High energy 6 00000E 07 eV Ref energy 1 45000E 07 eV Value at Ref 00 b Factor 0 0 Figure 112 The Add Preliminary modification window Add Enter details of the reaction in the text box dropdown list and with the radio buttons Select a type of modification in the Mod type dropdown list and add any values required in the text boxes Note that the boxes that require data are shown in white rather than grey If the Data merge Mod type 13 modification is chosen from the dropdown list then a list box of the source databases becomes visible If the Low energy merge Mod type 18 modif
63. modification are stored as Mod type 8 and Mod type 10 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 102 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion All the above modifications can be found automatically The remaining modifications involve changes to the interpolation law data but these require user interaction The first step is to generate a table of data points for non threshold reactions where there is a significant gap E Ej gt 1 5 between data points exclude reactions starting with E 0 This is done by clicking the Reaction data Prepare Adjacent cross section table menu item or the sixth check box in Figure 117 Then using this table a set of suspect reactions is found by clicking the Reaction data Find modifications Find all suspect interpolation laws sub menu item or ticking the fifteenth check box in Figure 117 A reaction is suspect if the ratio of energies gt 2 and the interpolation law is not 5 or 1 These suspect reactions can be viewed in the Interpolation law modifications window shown in Figure 118 this is displayed by clicking the Reaction data Find modifications Find interpolation law modifications manually sub menu item Note that at the same time the Targets and sources window Figure 67 also opens as the two windows are used together bed Interpolation law modifications 87 suspect reactions 1 suspect points Be 10 n g Be 11 60 B 10 n t Be 8 C 14 n g C 15 D 17 n a C 14 Mg 25 n g Mg 27 5 3
64. n p v 30 keV b 145MeV 84479E 02 b 20 0 MeV 3 3088E 02 b Figure 159 The Calculate systematics window User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 144 SAFEPAQ II Calculate systematics Target Co 60 Ag 108m format Final state Reaction n n v Og 9mOn 3 MeV 4 9212E 01 b 14 5 MeV b 20 0 MeV b Figure 160 The Calculate systematics window for n n reaction While working with SAFEPAQ II it is often useful to be able to find the atomic number Z for particular elements This can be found by clicking on the Tools View elements menu item that displays the Elements window shown in Figure 161 This shows Z and the chemical symbol for each element The name corresponding to the symbol can be seen by selecting an element and the name is shown in a ToolTip The window is closed by clicking the Close button Elements O C Ch Cn BUNE O zi CO UJ b c m m m HP m l Figure 161 The Elements window The type of reaction is shown in ENDF files by means of the MT value A list of MT numbers can be seen by clicking on the CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 145 Tools View MT numbers menu item that displays the MT numbers window shown in Figure 162 This shows MT and the conventional symbol for each reaction The standard ENDF MT numbers appear above the dividing line those below are non standard ones d
65. needed to be added This can be done by clicking on the Reaction data Add new reactions menu item that displays the Add new reactions window shown in Figure 104 A choice of which reactions to include is made by entering a value in the text box If the reaction in TALYS has a maximum cross section at some energy greater than this value then the reaction is added to the ReacSummary table in Parameter Clicking the Add button adds all the relevant reactions inp Add new reactions From the TALY S source with maximum XS gt 1 0E 6 b Targets O ore Figure 104 The Add new reactions window All option This is the default behaviour with the All Targets option selected If the One Targets option is selected then the window will be displayed as shown in Figure 105 This enables reactions for only the specified target with large enough cross section to be added from TALYS inp Add new reactions From the TALY S source with maximum 55 gt 10E 5 b Targets One Target W 184 4g 108m format Close Figure 105 The Add new reactions window One option User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 83 In the Add new reactions window Figure 104 and several other windows the word TALYS appears There are several data sources of this type and the one that is required to be used is entered in the Version of TALYS text box in the Settings window Figure 1 During the development of deuteron
66. number Point number Energy Cross section Name ID Source Curve Order Type Axis a b C d Type Number Long Number Integer Number Single Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Number Double Type Number Integer Text Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double PRARHRARAHRABDAHAAHRABRAAAAAAAND Size Size oo oo R1 N 7 DOWDANNNA GN User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 181 MT Number Integer 2 Details Text 50 AverageXS Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Spectrum ID Number Integer 2 Average XS Number Double 8 AverageXS Source Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source ID Number Integer 2 Spectrum ID Number Integer 2 Average XS Number Double 8 bound 069 Name Type Size Group number Number Integer 2 Energy Number Double 8 Weight Number Integer 2 bound 100 Name Type Size Group number Number Integer 2 Energy Number Double 8 Weight Number Integer 2 bound 172 Name Type Size Group number Number Integer 2 Energy Number Double 8 Weight fission Number Integer 2 Weight fusion Number Integer 2 bound 175 Name Type Size Group number Number Integer 2 Energy Number Double 8 Weight Number Integer 2 bound 211 Name Type Size Group number Number Integer 2 Energy Number Double 8 bound 315 Name Type Size Group numb
67. pre modifications exist for the reaction no attempt is made to select the correct reaction Clicking the View modifications button will open the Modifications window Figure 120 so that these can be checked Because it is possible that no modifications exist for the reaction no attempt is made to select the correct reaction The Quality score for the reaction is shown and it is possible to print or copy to the clipboard all the listed reactions by clicking the Print or Copy buttons respectively User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 121 If the C S option is selected in Figure 132 then addition options are shown It is possible to select reactions by their Quality score in the Scores group either All Scores those reactions with Score 0 or gt O can be selected by the radio buttons If reactions with Scores O or gt O are selected then the title in Figure 133 will show this Next to the C S radio button is shown the check box As C E If this is checked then only those reactions that have experimental data are included in the C S plot If the C S option is selected in Figure 132 then in Figure 134 there will be an additional button shown once a reaction is selected This Exclude button allows particular reactions to be excluded from the analysis Information on excluded reactions is stored in the validationExcluded file inthe ascii folder If the selected reaction has been excluded then the button changes to become the
68. project to be renamed with the name specified in the Name text box This process basically file copying takes about 2 minutes all timings given in this report are based on a 3 2 GHz PC processing an extended energy library Note that from EASY 2005 projects with an upper energy limit of 20 and 60 MeV can be treated In many cases details of menu items and windows will depend on which type is chosen this is done by clearing or ticking the Extended energy library check box in the Settings window Figure 1 In this report the 60 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion MeV library is treated as the standard a 20 MeV library is referred to a non extended library Note that from EASY 2007 projects with a range of incoming particles can be created The type of particle is determined by the Incoming particle selected in the Settings window Figure 1 In this report most of the examples assume that this is a neutron Clicking the Set as current button means that SAFEPAQ II will work with the new databases rather than the original ones This opens the Settings window Figure 1 with the changes displayed Clicking the Save button implements the changes Next the Compact databases window shown in Figure 4 is displayed When databases are written to and then data are deleted the storage of data can become very inefficient To reduce the size of the databases they need to be compacted This window c
69. solution a quadratic fit to the weighting spectrum over the energy range has been adopted and J indicates that an algebraic expression and the standard integral shown in equation 28 has been used Gamma fun indicates that an incomplete gamma function has been used Weighting Flat 1 E Maxwellian Fission Velocity Law thermal spectrum exp fusion 1 constant Simple Simple hi Quadratic fit J 2 lin lin Simple Simple h Quadratic fit 71 h 3 log E lino Simple Simple pl Quadratic fit J Ly 4 lin E log o Simple a H Quadratic fit Quadratic fit 5 log log Simple Simple Gamma fun Quadratic fit Gamma fun Annex Standard integrals See reference 1 for all except A13 which is taken from 2 CCFE Fusion m ax ax r m x arena ne Son ctm Ea In x X ince as s ax e m r dx in z y EL ii In xye 1 Y a i l d ax 1 oo ax i fene dx ax D In x 1 LEE 3 A5 mcoe xln x x fx noas x n x Lx fe In x dx Xx In x d Explicit formulae for the standard integral I Ej 5 a defined in equation 28 are given for n 1 1 2 3 1 1 E E a E De aE e a User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 211 LX VES m ate 2aE 2 e qa E 2aE 2 e A10 a 13 E E gt sate 3a E2 6aE 6 e qa E 3a EF 6aE
70. state then all the reactions are shown The data grid shows the Multiplicity of the data the Q value QD the number of interpolation regions NR and number of data points NP Clicking the Copy to Cache button will add the data in the grid to Cache Note that when Final data are transferred to the Cache a check is made to determine if the data are already in the Cache if they are then these data are removed prior to copying If the selected database is Master then an additional checkbox Copy data as Test to Cache is available Ticking this copies the data from Master to Cache and an additional copy 1s also copied to Cache as Test If the Copy all reactions for target check box is ticked then clicking the Copy to Cache button copies all reactions for the selected target to the Cache This is extremely useful if summed reactions with MT gt 200 are required A time saving feature introduced from EASY 2005 means that when the Data selection window is opened the database and target that were selected when the window was last closed are again selected User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II T Data selection ON 5 x Database path Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq_2009_1 final mdb Available source databases Internal databases Mester Final ACTL x T Targets Reactions l C Copy all reactions for target 0 18 n2np F 19 n 3np Ne 20 n n 2p Ne 21 n n pa Ne 22 r a ez na
71. store all nuclear data in relational databases The second was the decision to construct the User Interface to run on a Windows PC rather than under UNIX experience with the development of such interfaces on both UNIX and PC environments had shown that the PC route was much quicker and more flexible The application that has been produced is named SAFEPAQ II it was developed from scratch initially using Visual Basic 5 with the data stored in Access 97 databases and accessed by the DAO API The version described in this issue 8 has been upgraded to use Visual Basic NET Access 2003 databases and the ADO NET API Both the VB5 and VB NET versions run User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion SAFEPAQ II Objectives Organising data Viewing data Altering data CCFE Fusion under Windows XP on a PC with large enough hard disks to enable all data files to be stored on line There are six main objectives of the SAFEPAQ II application e Organising data e Viewing data e Altering data e Processing data e Analysing data e Logging modifications For both the cross section and decay data libraries many sources of data are required to compile the final libraries In both cases each source library is stored in a separate folder containing both the raw data in the native format and the Access database for cross sections The SAFEPAQ II databases are stored in a separate folder that may be on a different hard disk Altho
72. t 2nte nit nt ntn d 2np nt Figure 55 The EXFOR reaction type window for n t If the selected reaction is n h then the dialog shown in Figure 56 is displayed One of the radio buttons should be selected and the OK button clicked The original EXFOR data will be saved as data for the reaction specified EXFOR reaction type The reaction must be defined Choose a reaction for this data set O nn 2p fnpd rh hen h 2nhe n h 9 inh O nh 2pspd nh Figure 56 The EXFOR reaction type window for nh If the selected reaction is n a then the dialog shown in Figure 57 is displayed One of the radio buttons should be selected and the OK button clicked The original EXFOR data will be saved as data for the reaction specified CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 41 EXFOR reaction type The reaction must be defined Choose a reaction for this data set O innh inp namas2nas nxa na na n h pt nat Figure 57 The EXFOR reaction type window for n a If the selected reaction is n n a then the dialog shown in Figure 58 is displayed One of the radio buttons should be selected and the OK button clicked The original EXFOR data will be saved as data for the reaction specified EXFOR reaction type The reaction must be defined Choose a reaction for this data set
73. the File Copy to Test menu item is enabled If the reaction has preliminary modifications and or modifications then it is possible to carry out the modifications from the two viewing windows Figure 111 and Figure 120 and put the data for the reaction into Test If no modifications exist then clicking this menu item will put a copy of the Master data into Test Clicking the File Create Test for all targets Final User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 64 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion reactions menu item creates data in Test for all reactions in Final for the selected target If the data in the Cache are changed while the Cache contents window is open then the reactions listed can be refreshed by clicking the View Refresh data menu item Data can be placed in the Cache from other databases so that they can be visualised by clicking the File Data selection menu item or the first toolbar button This displays the Data selection window shown in Figure 82 The available source databases are shown in the dropdown list selecting one of these will show the targets present in the first list box and selecting a target shows the reactions present in the second list box Alternatively one of the three SAFEPAQ II databases can be selected from the list box Whichever database is selected its path is shown at the top of the window The data for the selected reaction are shown in the data grid Note that if there are more than one final
74. the file The window is closed by clicking the Close button Calculate Q value calculated For all the n 2n reactions See file Q_n2n in ascii Folder i Q value threshold Sn and Sp Cancel Figure 158 The Calculate Q value confirmation dialog Systematic formulae are used for many purposes in SAFEPAQ II Details of these are available in the EASY documentation 10 The values used for the various reactions and energies can be seen by clicking on the Tools Calculate systematics menu item this displays the Calculate systematics window shown in Figure 159 Enter the target in the text box and select the reaction from the dropdown list Clicking the Calculate button displays the available systematics values Depending on the reaction type systematics at one two or three energies are displayed By default the standard sytematics formulae are used but if the Experimental data Systematics Alternate submenu item is checked then the alternate set of formulae are used in the calculations The window is closed by clicking the Close button If the reaction chosen is n n then the window has additional options as shown in Figure 160 Only the 3 MeV value is shown instead of the standard 30 keV value and the final state of the daughter must be chosen in the Final state group by selecting one of the g m or n radio buttons 7 Calculate systematics Target Fe 56 g 108m format Reaction
75. to have a data scrap with more than one interpolation law This tab should be clicked and then the points required selected A file name will be suggested in the text box based on the current reaction in Figure 74 this was v 50n p which can then be customised as required Clicking the Save button on the tab writes the scrap to the file Data scraps can be merged with the current reaction data if these are from Test using the Load tab Figure 75 The scraps can either have been generated using the Save tab or by using the Scrap editor described below The available scraps are shown in the list box select one of these and then click one of the radio buttons in the Adjust to fit group If None is selected then the scrap data replace data in that range for the current reaction If At low E is selected then the scrap data are scaled so that they have the same value as the current data at the low energy point If At high E is selected then the scrap data are scaled so that they have the same value as the current data at the high energy point If At both E is selected then the scrap data are scaled so that they have the same value as the current data at both the low and high energy points This is done by scaling by a factor that varies linearly with energy between the given factors at the low and high energies Data scraps were described above Although it is useful to be able to extract these from an existing file it may be necessary to create on
76. using the Modify reaction window Figure 101 at this stage but if Master and Final have already been produced then the Single reaction window Figure 124 is to be preferred Note that if the Modify reaction window Figure 101 is used to change the source and Master already exists then this will cause problems as the Reaction list window Figure 100 will show this change reflecting the change in Parameter but Master will still contain the original source It is possible to change all instances of a data source to another for all targets in a specified ZAI range ZAI 10000 x Z 10 x A I Clicking on the Reaction data Global source replace menu item displays the Global source replace User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 82 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion window shown in Figure 103 Enter the original and new data source identifiers and the ZAI limits in the text boxes and click the Replace button to make the change Global source replace Change all instances of TALYS 6 to TALYS Ba forZAl gt 892250 andZ4l lt 990000 Close as the source of reaction data Figure 103 The Global source replace window When moving from an EAF library with an upper energy limit of 20 MeV to one with 60 MeV a considerable number of reactions need to be added In the construction of EAF 2005 the TALYS data source was used extensively Reactions present in TALYS but not in the previous EAF library EAF 2003
77. with missing threshold uncertainty data menu item to display the Threshold reactions with missing uncert window shown in Figure 41 Any displayed reactions should have uncertainty data added User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 31 M M Threshold reactions with missing uncert 1 reactions Eu 153 n 2n Eu 152g Close Figure 41 The threshold reactions with missing uncert window The experimental data contain references to the source of the data These references are held in the Parameter database and can be viewed by clicking on Experimental data View References or the seventeenth toolbar button to display the References window shown in Figure 42 A Source ID and the reference text are shown As indicated by the window text it is possible to add a new reference or edit an existing one Editing is done by changing the text Note that the Source ID should not be changed Fil References x t3 Source Reference AD 73 Adamov Y M et al 2 All Union Conf on Neutron Physics Kiev May 1973 4 21 AD 6 Adamoy Y M et al 3 All Union Conf on Neutron Physics Kiev 1976 AD Adamoy Y M et al 4 All Union Conf on Neutron Physics Kiev April 1977 18 22 AD83 Adamo Y M et al 5 All Union Conf on Neutron Physics Kiev October 1983 2 134 AH87 Ahmad M et al Nucl Sci Eng 95 1987 296 ALB5 Alford W L R D Koehler BAP 10 1965 260 AL83 Al
78. y minimum 0 O00E 00 y maximum 1 OOOE 00 Figure 69 The x y ranges window Checking the Options Legend menu item displays a submenu that shows the two positions of the legend on the plot Right or Left Changing this can be useful if the legend overlaps the data points Checking the Options Show symbols for data points menu item or the ninth toolbar button plots the data points that make up each curve Checking the Options Show interpolated values menu item or the tenth toolbar button shows the position of interpolated data between the selected data points determined by the interpolation law between the points To use this it is necessary to first click this and then click the data selection tool and then select the points by dragging with the mouse Checking the Options Data selection menu item or the eleventh toolbar button changes the cursor to a cross hair and enables points to be selected click and drag the mouse to display a rubber band around the selected points Checking the Overplot experimental menu item or the twelfth toolbar button plots the experimental data points note that clicking the toolbar actually stops the plotting of the data points the graph is cleared Checking the Options Overplot EXFOR menu item or the thirteenth toolbar button removes the experimental data points and plots any available EXFOR data instead Note that if the Options Include exp with EXFOR menu item is checked then both
79. 0 0 0 0 0 95242 95242 95242 4008 4008 4008 11025 12025 11025 12025 daughter 33 0 1 33 33 33 99 99 99 99 MT 16 16 16 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 z D mll Bem Figure 79 The Cache contents window Clicking the Edit Find menu item displays the Find window shown in Figure 80 Enter the required target nuclide and click the Find First button or use the Enter key to display this reaction in the Cache grid Futher reactions with this target can be found by clicking the Find Next button or use the Enter key The window can be closed by clicking the Close button 98 Find Target Br 81 5g 108m format Find Next Close Figure 80 The Find window Clicking the View Reaction data menu item displays the Reaction data window Figure 70 for the selected nuclide Clicking the gt gt and lt lt menu items moves to the end and beginning of the Cache data respectively A reaction can be removed from the Cache by clicking the Edit Delete reaction menu item the Cache can be competely emptied by clicking the Edit Delete All menu item Prior to the data being removed the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 81 is displayed User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 62 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion Cache Cache contains 6915 reactions d Delete all reactions from Cache Figure 81 The confirmation dialog prior
80. 0 CCFE Fusion 140 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion Selecting the Reactions radio button will display the important reactions as shown in Figure 154 If none of the check boxes in the Reactions group are selected then all the important reactions are shown in the left hand list box there are 5096 of them for EASY 2007 Checking the Target check box allows an element to be selected from the dropdown list and then the left hand list box only shows those reactions with the selected element as the target Checking the Reaction check box allows a reaction type to be selected from the dropdown list and then the left hand list box only shows those reactions with the selected reaction type Checking the Importance check box allows an importance 1 5 or Major 4 or 5 to be selected from the dropdown list and then the left hand list box only shows those reactions with the selected importance Selecting a reaction shows the Primary daughter nuclides that are produced by the reaction in the right hand list box Results from a new analysis can be read in by clicking the Read reactions button from the ImportanceSummary2 txt file which was generated by a series of FISPACT calculations Moving the mouse over either of the Copy or Print buttons displays a ToolTip stating that clicking the button will Copy Print the contents of the left hand list box while clicking the button with the Shift key pressed will Copy Print the contents of the right hand list bo
81. 007 option enables the Options Importance values used submenu which gives eight options to select various values of the importance Clicking the Options Distinguish Scores menu item will indicate whether the reactions have Quality Score gt or 0 by the use of two colours Clicking the Options Distinguish Threshold reactions menu item will indicate whether the reactions have a threshold or not by the use of two colours Note that this option is only appropriate for certain classes of reactions such as n p These five menu items act as toggles and the ticks indicates which option is selected Note that only one of them can be applied at any time selecting one will disable the other options If a point is clicked with the right mouse button then it can be excluded from the display If the Options Allow symbol change menu item is checked then it is possible to show particular points as a red triangle instead of the usual blue circle so allowing particular points to be identified when the graph is copied to an external document This can be done by clicking the point with the middle mouse button or by clicking the Options Change symbol for nuclide menu item which displays a small dialog shown in Figure 146 which enables a target nuclide to be entered User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 132 SAFEPAQ II 5 Analysis graph Wok File Edit Options 1E 01 1E 00 1E 01 1E 02 Max cross section b 1E 03
82. 08 2 200E 05 9 000E 05 2 1949 FIS ANL49 028 1 000E 06 1 000E 06 2 Figure 49 The EXFOR sources window It is possible to view the complete EXFOR index file for this nuclide by clicking the View index button which displays the EXFOR index window shown in Figure 50 Note that if the columns do not line up correctly then adjust the value in the EXFOR index width text box in the Settings window Figure 1 EXFOR index 10536 018 0 47 107 N 2N M SIG NN2 N2N 1 00 30 1 00E 30 F LAS75 ll 1 3E 07 2 4E 07 A 10536 019 0 47 107 N 2N M SIG NNZ N2N 1 00 30 1 00E 30 F LAS75 2 2 6E 07 2 6E 07 10536 020 0 47 107 N 2N M SIG NN2 N2N 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F LAS75 4 1 6E 07 2 8E 07 10536 021 0 47 107 N 3N G SIG N33 NXN 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F LAS75 7 1 8E 07 2 4E 07 10536 022 0 47 107 N 3N G 5IG N33 NXN 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F LAS75 2 2 6E 07 2 6E 07 10536 023 0 47 107 N 3N G 5IG N33 NXN 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F LAS75 2 2 8E 07 2 8E 07 10876 002 0 47 107 N TOT SIG TOT TOT 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F ANL79 88 2 6E 05 4 5E 06 10876 003 0 47 107 N EL DA 002 DEL 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F ANL79 320 1 5E 06 4 0E 06 10876 004 0 47 107 N EL SIG SEL SEL 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F ANL79 l6 1 5E 06 4 0E 06 10876 005 0 47 107 N INL PAR SIG SI3 SIN 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F ANL79 131 1 5E 06 3 6E 06 11010 011 0 47 107 N G G 5IG NG NG 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F ANLS1 l 2 4E 04 2 4E 04 11043 140 0 47 107 N EL POT SIG POT SEL 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F OR
83. 0E 00 9 2166E 01 Copy Close 6 2000E 07 1 5000E 08 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 v Figure 189 The Compare modifications window Clicking the Tools Compare EXFOR submenu item displays the Compare EXFOR window shown in Figure 190 This shows reactions where there are differences in the data sets selected for plotting from the EXFOR CD ROMs and stored in User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 162 SAFEPAQ II the SAFEPAQ II EXFOR database The Use P flag shows if the data entry is used for visualisation The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively ft Compare EXFOR mm Full Access Use P 17 entries 203340050 Li 6 n g 315700030 Li 6 n p 225150030 Li B n t 326510020 Li B n t 141050020 Li n g 223450040 Be 3 n a 315580040 B 10 n a 201320040 Figure 190 The Compare EXFOR window Clicking the Tools Compare Private EXFOR submenu item displays the Compare Private EXFOR window shown in Figure 191 This shows reactions where there are differences in the Private EXFOR data sets stored in the SAFEPAQ II EXFOR database The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively Compare Private EXFOR E Reaction Full amp ccess Figure 191 The Compare Private EXFOR window Clicking the Tools Compare Uncertainty da
84. 1 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 05 2 0000E 01 1 0000E 01 2 0000E 01 20000E 01 1 0000E 02 1 0000E 03 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 05 4 0000E 01 1 1200E 01 1 0000E 00 1 0000E 00 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 05 3 3300E 01 1 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 1 2082E 05 1 0000E 05 5 0000E 00 1 0000E 2 0000E 00 1 0000E 00 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 05 4 0000E 01 1 5000E 01 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 03 1 0000E 05 3 0000E 01 1 0000E 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 01 1 0000E 06 5 0000E 01 7 9100E 01 1 0000E 00 1 0000E 00 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 07 3 0000E 01 1 0500E 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 2 0000E 05 3 0000E 01 6 2500E 5 0000E 01 5 0000E 01 v Figure 142 The Final uncertainties window It is sometimes useful to be able to show all reactions that produce a particular nuclide Clicking the Tools Reactions for daughter menu item displays the Reactins to daughter window shown in Figure 143 Enter a nuclide in the Daughter textbox use g m n if there is more that one isomeric state for the nuclide Clicking the Get reactions button shows the reactions and the final state in the list box Selecting a single reaction enables it to be copied to the clipboard or printed to the default printer by clicking the Copy or Print buttons respectively Se Reactions to daughter Daughter Co 60m Ag 108q format Reaction Final State 56 reactio
85. 1 0E 1 1 0E 0 1 0E 1 1 0E 2 9 1 0E 3 c 1 0E 4 Sg 5 10E 5 E aw 1 0E 6 1 0E 7 1 0E 8 1 0E 9 1 0E 10 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 Neutron Energy eV Figure 96 The Reaction rate window The menu bar in Figure 96 allows the plot to be printed to the default printer by clicking the File Print menu item and copied to the clipboard by clicking the Edit Copy menu item The y axis can be plotted either linearly or logarithmically by clicking Options y axis which displays a submenu with Log and Lin items The axes ranges can be changed by clicking the Options Axis scale menu item which displays the Axis scale window shown in Figure 89 Change the values in the text boxes and then click the Apply button to alter the ranges Returning to Figure 95 clicking the Plot button displays the Integral C E graph window shown in Figure 97 This shows the C E values for the various neutron spectra with error bars representing the experimental uncertainty If uncertainty data exist in the Final database then the uncertainty value for the User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 76 SAFEPAQ II reaction is used to display an error band around the C E 1 value If the Options Show values menu item is checked then the C E values are displayed next to each point and on the error band The graph can be printed to the default printer by clicking the File Print menu item and copied to the clipboard by clicking the Edit Copy
86. 175F Source Group 175V Link Group 175V Source Group 211F Link Group 211F Source Group 315F Link Group 315F Source CCFE Fusion Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Long Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number
87. 176 1 Overall Str Ctur iisccsdccccssices sesccdcccccscsscccstccdssccsecstecsecesssccscudssecesdesceuscudseeseus 176 airrnrcidiiclpuleee cc aeuieiecaaceavaccenes 176 3 The definition of the generic mdb database tables eee 177 4 The definition of the library mdb database tables 179 S The definition of the parameter mdb database tables 180 6 The definition of the master mdb database tables 190 7 The definition of the cache mdb database tables 190 8 The definition of the final mdb database tables 191 9 The definition of the EXFOR mdb database tables 194 Appendix 2 Practical details edo vi te iere ect eret eius 196 File lOCAGIONS REED 196 Linked Ca DlOS RETAIL CCLLOINBBEIILIUTL 196 KAS file fOrm t sissecseccssesasetessceedesceseecsaseosssdsdesQeavsdensssdessVesdecenceccseveseusavenseccssoevecase 197 XY table file format sisscscessscsccccsccssscssssssecccscsscdesssessecdescscsedasnveessscescdessgncsesdeececec es 198 Serap Tile formato deterior erpe ters en o rper e b ce ety apes ko Tos bupnE 0s PA stressis 199 RO e 199 Appendix 3 Multi group cross sections esee e eee e ee eren eene enne tnne 199 Introdu ction ieeeeie itecto oe eee eee pee tero eee eret e Pea a
88. 2 n a 5i 23 5 33 n p P 33 33 n a Si 30 CI 35 n p 5 35 bal Low energy ev High energy ev vl Ignored Figure 118 The Interpolation law modifications window New law in range The Interpolation law modifications window shows the suspect reactions in the list box and when one is selected the number of suspect points and their point numbers are shown At the same time data for this reaction are copied to the Cache if they are not already present and the target and reaction are selected in the Targets and sources window From here it is possible to plot the data in the usual way and decide if there is a need to modify the interpolation law If the law is correct then click the Ignore button in Figure 118 the window shows this User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 103 by the word Ignored and the status is stored in the database However if some of the data points do require law changes then select these points in the Data visualisation window Figure 68 these points are also selected in the Reaction data window Figure 70 or the points can be selected directly in the Reaction data window The high and low points of the selected data are then also shown in the text boxes in Figure 118 Select a new law in the dropdown list and click the Save Mod button to add a new modification Note that the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 119 is displayed before the modification i
89. 3 and P4 refer to third and fourth order polynomial fits and Exp to an exponental fit Generate cross section data max Reaction inp Target Co 59 Calculated threshold 7 96192E 05 eV Asymmetry 8 47458E Maximum cross section 09187E Energy at maximum 1 50621E 07 gy Cross section at 20 MeV 3 88371E4 Cross section at 30 MeV 2 51515E Cross section at 60 MeV 5 07716E 9 60357E 06 gy 2 64092E 07 ay 0 02 E energy Skewness E energy Skewness Fitting options 1 P3EthE Em P3 Em E ExpfE E60 2 P3EthE Em PA Em E30 E60 Exp E30 60 0E 0 1E 7 2E47 3E 7 4E 7 5E 7 6E 7 3 P3EthE Em P3 Em E20 Exp E20 E60 4 Modified Lorentzian fit Em E 5 Modified Lorentzian fit E Em E pia anha Close vj N Generated cross section curve Bl Parameter data points Ag 108m format ERT 02 0 08 02 p 02 4 02 5 03 5 Cross section b 0 00 mas Neutron energy eV CCFE Fusion Figure 151 The Generate cross section data window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 139 Warning 1 You have not stored the trendline For all required quantities Use the cross section analysis tools to do this Figure 152 Warning that trend line information is missing Clicking the Copy to Cache button will copy the plotted curve to Cache using the data source label Generated_n where n is the num
90. 6927E 01 Ta Figure 90 The Average cross sections window The experimental integral data can be viewed by clicking on the Integral data View Integral data menu item or the sixteenth toolbar button which displays the Integral data window shown in Figure 91 Selecting a target shows which reactions have data and selecting a reaction displays the available data in the grid In addition to the spectrum name cross section and uncertainty shown in the first three columns the final column shows a flag This indicates whether the data are to be used so allowing several data in the same spectrum The source of the data is indicated by a reference where this is known i Integral data E Targets Reactions Ca42 n pal Ca 44 n t Ca 48 n 3n Sc 45 n 2n Ti 46 Ti 47 Ti 48 Ti 49 Ti 50 Delta X sec b Add 4 285300E 03 5 820000E 03 1 226160E 02 1 900860E 02 Cross Section b 2 291600E 02 3 01 0000E 02 Spectrum fng_vanad asc Modify fng_chromium a gt fzk_ss316 3 503310E 02 fzk ss316 5 7887 70E 02 Mollendorff U v et al FZKA 6764 2002 Delete Close C E Close CCFE Fusion Figure 91 The Integral data window User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 71 Clicking the Modify button will display the selected data in editing boxes below the reference Changes to the data values or the flag can then be
91. 7 2 0 00000 Primary Li 8 UKPADD 6 7 2 0 04191 O Secondary Be 7 LNHB 2 0 00340 Ciro Be 10 UKPADD 6 7 2 0 00000 Be 1l UKPADD 6 7 2 0 09150 c 11 LNHB 2 0 01927 Original source C 14 LNHB 2 0 00128 AI C 15 UKPADD 6 7 2 0 07330 NUBASE N 13 LNHB 2 0 01856 C ENSDF N 16 UKPADD 6 7 2 0 05768 UKPADD 447 nuclides Order by LNHB Nuclide O JEF Delta Saal Sus Figure 156 Dominant nuclides window Miscellaneous tools It is often useful to know the Q value for a reaction Clicking on the Tools Calculate Q value menu item displays the Calculate Q value window shown in Figure 157 Enter the target in the text box and select the reaction from the dropdown list Clicking the Calculate button displays the Q value the threshold and also the target neutron Sn and proton Sp separation energies Calculate Q value Target Fe 56 Ag 108m format Reaction n 2n v Q value 1 11975E 07 eV Calculate Threshold 1 13994E 07 eV TargetSn 1 11975E 07 eV eh lapis Target Sp 101836E407 eV Figure 157 The Calculate Q value window If the All targets button is clicked then the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 158 opens where the location of the file in this case Q n2n in the ascii folder is shown Clicking the OK button will write the four values for each of the reactions of the CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 143 selected type to
92. 727800E 07 2 813421E 01 1 764400E 07 2 833625E 01 1 837600E 07 2 847959E 01 Close 2 200000E 07 lla jl w ba m je 1 0450DE 7 ev 1 06288E 7 eV Wapstra O value 1 04535E ev Wapstra threshold 1 06324E ev File Q W apstra B 0 99966 0 034 2 414311E 01 File Q value File threshold Figure 70 The Reaction data window Some data sets contain many points and because of a limit on the number of rows in the data grid and also to speed up loading the data it 1s necessary to split a large data set into pages Each page contains a maximum of 10 000 data points and if paging is necessary then the lt and gt buttons are enabled User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 54 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion These display the next gt and previous lt page of data as appropriate At the bottom of the Reaction data window are six tabs By default the fourth is shown when the window opens This shows the Q value and threshold for the file and those from the Wapstra mass table The ratio gives a good indication as to whether the Q value is correct in the file The Save tab is also active for any data source but if the source of the reaction data is the Test database but not for any other source then the other four tabs become active The five tabs other than the fourth one shown in Figure 70 are shown in Figure 71 Figure 75 E e ks Ea e J O x0 01 0 2
93. CCFE Fusion Figure 22 The Decay chain window Clicking the View Plot line energies menu item in Figure 2 or the fourth toolbar button displays the Line spectrum window shown in Figure 23 This plots the gamma and X ray lines in blue and red respectively that are emitted by the nuclide The graph can be printed to the default printer by clicking the File Print menu item and it can be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Edit Copy menu item The graph is Hot by clicking on the top of any of the lines information about it is displayed in the status bar User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQM II 19 m Line spectrum m File X Edit Co 60 4 X ray 6 gamma lines 2 o gt o pun c LLI o j 1 0E 4 1 0E 5 1 0E 7 Energy eV Click at top of line to display values Line 4 Energy 1 33E 06 eV Intensity 1 33E 06 eV ME X Ray li gammas Figure 23 The Line spectrum window Source libraries The first step in the construction of an EAF cross section library is to read all the various source libraries These source libraries are read and converted to a standard database structure Details of the libraries are stored in the Library database Because the source files may be in various formats the reading options must be specified Click on Libraries Library options or the twenty first toolbar button to display the Library options window shown in Figure 24 User manuat Issue 8 M
94. Clicking the Edit Copy coefficients menu item copies the Trend line coefficients onto the clipboard using 4 decimal places This gives a higher accuracy than in the Main window status bar and is useful if the equation is to be used for other studies There are two additional options on the Edit menu related to the custom lines discussed above Clicking the Edit Remove current custom line menu item removes details of the current line so that another has to be defined Clicking the Edit Remove all custom lines menu item details of all the stored custom lines The Plot menu item allows the graph to be redrawn In the earlier discussion of validation plots the option of producing C T plots was mentioned in the Validation plots window Figure 132 These can only be produced by opening an extended version of the window Clicking the Validation button displays the extended version of the Validation plots window Figure 149 It will be noted that the C T type option is selected by default and that three additional sets of options are available the variable on the C T axis either A or s the Trend type Log or Power and the Score values LL Validation plots p 4 Scores Reaction n 2n iv AI O 00 gt 0 Graph C T axis Histogram OA 9 s Trend type Type Log CS Systematic Power CXE Experiment C T Trend Figure 149 Validation plots extended window No
95. Close Figure 171 The Edit person window A list of the available entries can be found by clicking the Tools Helpdesk List entries menu item which displays the List entries window shown in Figure 172 Select an entry from the List by dropdown list Surname Organisation Type Source Before date Unfinished and Completed are options In the first five cases a criterion must be entered in the Criteria combo box if a suitable criterion is available in the dropdown list then it can be selected Clicking the List button will display the selected entries The list can be printed by clicking the Print button Select an entry in the list and click on the Edit button to display the Edit entry widow which is identical to Figure 170 It is now possible to enter information in the Response and User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 152 SAFEPAQ II Date finished textboxes If the entry was completed today then today s date can be entered by clicking the Today button The changes can be stored in the database by clicking the Save button Clicking the Close button closes the window List entries FI Date 2005 02 15 2005 02 22 2005 03 02 2006 06 07 2006 06 09 2007 02 01 2008 01 22 Person Robin Forrest Robin Forrest Robin Forrest Robin Forrest Robin Forrest Robin Forrest Robin Forrest Organisation Type Source Description UKAEA SAFEPAQ4I Idea Decided that needed to incorporate the FI
96. Double 8 DIntensity Number Double 8 Log Name Type Size Date Time Date Time 8 Action Text 100 Comment Text 100 Type Number Byte 1 UserlD Text 3 ModAdhocAdd Name Type Size Mod number Number Long 4 Reaction number Number Long 4 ModAdhocDel Name Type Size Mod number Number Long 4 Reaction number Number Long 4 Mod type Number Integer 2 E low Number Double 8 E high Number Double 8 E ref Number Double 8 X ref Number Double 8 factor Number Double 8 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 186 SAFEPAQ II ModDetails Name Type Size Mod type Number Integer 2 Action Text 30 Specification Text 200 Modification Name Type Size Mod number Number Long 4 Mod type Number Integer 2 E low Number Double 8 E high Number Double 8 E ref Number Double 8 X ref Number Double 8 factor Number Double 8 Add number Number Long 4 Exp number Number Long 4 Kind Number Byte 1 Comment Text 50 ModSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Number Mods Number Integer 2 Mod 1 Number Long 4 Mod 2 Number Long 4 Mod 3 Number Long 4 Mod 4 Number Long 4 Mod 5 Number Long 4 Mod 6 Number Long 4 Mod 7 Number Long 4 Mod 8 Number Long 4 Mod 9 Number Long 4 Mod 10 Number Long 4 NucComments Name Type Size Nuclide number Number Integer 2 Comments Memo NucProperties Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 Isom Number Integer 2 MAT Number Integer 2 AWR Number
97. E 02 3 160100E 02 1 073000E 01 Test XS b 3 283428E 02 3 325072E 02 7 7 4103E 02 1 030638E 01 C E 0 33677 0 37365 0 84869 0 36058 v Copy C E Reaction rate Energy eV 1 964030E 07 1 733250E 07 1 690460E 07 1 648720E 07 1 558310E 07 1 491820E 07 1 454990E 07 1 419070E 07 1 384030E 07 1 349860E 07 1 284030E 07 1 252320E 07 Group XS b 5 702333E 02 7 002605E 02 7 576451E 02 8 500953 02 9 78061 7E 02 1 075278E 01 1 121068E 01 1 144827E 01 1 156355E 01 1 159851E 01 1 133802E 01 1 082283E 01 Factor 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 A Factor 3 1 00000 Copy Gx5 Print GXS Apply Close CCFE Fusion Figure 95 The C E Integral data window enlarged Clicking on a spectrum displays the group cross sections in the lower grid the number of energy points and the weighting are shown above the lower grid Initially the Factor for each group value is 1 0 If it is required to alter the group data to get a better C E value then select the required groups and alter the factor in the text box Clicking the Apply button will display the new factor in the lower grid recalculate the C E value and display it in the upper grid and enable the Save as mods button Note that all spectra with the same number of groups irrespective of the weighting have their C E values updated Clicking th
98. E SE J E E gt 2Cge T 2B 2 P 2B 2 Ve P oR wo wes 5 kT kT RM AUAM EE C pp PL EM tM I MO 69 Equation 69 is only valid for B gt 1 in order to extend the range to more negative vales of B equation 67 can be integrated by parts K is defined by equation 70 and F E E2 by equation 71 JOE Ey Ce K Ep jp de tne a ert 70 1 n n F Ei E o VB exp JE JkT JE ex S48 ftr 71 Then K can be written in several forms as shown in equations 72 74 following integration by parts 5K K F 7 2 p 0230 Pees 72 5F 5 K K F 3 4 nom ER 73 kT 2B 2 kT 2B 2 2B 3 2 3 K Fy4 5F 5 F Brea kT 2B 2 kT QB 2 2B 3 kT 2B 2 2B 3 2B 4 ludunt DI pendant E 74 K can be written in terms of gamma functions in a similar fashion to equation 69 as shown in equation 75 2B n 1 kT SE SE K E E T 2B n4 1 P 2B n 1 gt P 2B n 1 3 ER 5 kT k f with B gt 1 n 2 For more negative values of B a quadratic fit as described in the fission spectrum weighting section is used User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 210 SAFEPAQ II Summary A summary of the method of solution in each of the 25 cases is given in the following table Note that Simple indicates an algebraic function of Ej E o and o Quadratic fit indicates that due to the complexity of the
99. Figure 92 include the various summed reactions with MT identifiers gt 200 see Table 1 In some cases experiments have been carried out on elements rather than isotopes In order to improve the estimation of the isotopic effective cross section from the elemental value under the assumption that the elemental value applies to the most abundant isotope a calculation can be carried out using the current cross section values User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 72 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion Clicking the Integral data Elemental analysis menu item displays the Elemental analysis window shown in Figure 93 The element spectrum and reaction are selected from the dropdown lists and the elemental cross section and uncertainty are entered in the text boxes The required isotope generally the most abundant is selected by clicking one of the radio buttons to the left of the table and the Get data button is clicked The particle production cross sections for the various isotopes are calculated and entered in the third column of the table When all the cross sections have been calculated then the sum is formed and the k values defined in equation 2 are calculated and displayed in the fourth column In equation 2 the cross sections 67 are the library values while f are the abundances Finally the isotopic cross section value is displayed in the text box k eio 2 i By default the natural abundances are displayed in th
100. Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 12 SAFEPAQ II Decay data CCFE Fusion The first task when building a new EAF project is to deal with the choice of required nuclides and their decay data Bl Nuctide tist Element Co Ag format Cab lake Nuclide Source Co 61 JEFF 311 m Add Co 62 JEFF 311 Co 62n jef22 dec cul Modify Co 63 JEFF 311 Co 64 JEFF 311 Co 65 JEFF 311 Co 66 JEFF 311 v Figure 11 The Nuclide list window The sources of data for the nuclides of each element can be viewed in the Nuclide list window shown in Figure 11 This is displayed by clicking on the Decay data Nuclide list menu item or the third toolbar button from the right Enter the symbol for the element and click the Get data button The data source for a selected nuclide can be modified by clicking the Modify button to display the Modify nuclide window shown in Figure 12 Note that you need to decide if the nuclide will be considered as a target in the cross section library by ticking the Target check box Click the Modify button in Figure 12 to save the change Modify nuclide Nuclide Co 55 Source JEFF 311 JEFF 311 stables ukpadd65 ukpadd66 ukpadd6s Modif pes Figure 12 The Modify nuclide window A selected nuclide can be removed from the nuclide list by clicking the Delete button in Figure 11 and a new nuclide can be added by clicking the Add
101. LSL 1 2 5E 02 2 5E 02 11043 141 0 47 107 N THS BA SIG SBA TSL 1 00E 30 1 00E 30 F RLSl 1 2 5E 02 2 5E 02 M Figure 50 The EXFOR index window Selecting a particular source in Figure 49 enables a detailed view of the data by clicking the Data button which displays the EXFOR data window shown in Figure 51 the reaction name is placed in the title bar of the window This displays information about the experiment authors institute title of paper reference and the neutron monitor information on the daughter state this is taken from the DecayData table in Parameter not from anything stored in the EXFOR file and the data points In some cases the file specifies that a particular daughter state was measured in this case the Final state can be selected from the available radio buttons The original EXFOR file can be viewed by clicking the View file button which User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 38 SAFEPAQ II displays the EXFOR file window shown in Figure 52 This is sometimes necessary to check on the final state or other details Note that in the Final state group the expected g m n and Total options are available There is an additional entry Mixed which should be selected if the data points in the grid refer to different final states as indicated in the FS column If Mixed is selected then when the data are saved these are stored in several entries with the correct final states
102. Li 6 n q Li 7 Li 6 n t He 4 Li 7 n d He 6 B ll n d Be 10 C 12 n a Be 9 Figure 116 The Reactions with multiple data merges window To check which reactions have been extended by a data merge with TALYS data click the Reaction data Find reactions from TALYS with a data merge menu item This displays the Reactions from TALYS with a data merge window which is the same as Figure 116 except that the caption is different The TALYS data source may not contain high energy cross section data for all reactions in the EAF project A second source of data up to 60 MeV is from the IEAF 2001 library In order to use this data source automatically for any reactions not already completed by data from TALYS click the Reaction data Find all high energy data merge pre modifications Find all gt 20 MeV data merge IEAF pre modifications menu item This searches through the reaction list and for each reaction with no data gt 20 MeV checks if such data exist in IEAF 2001 If so then the data are extracted scaled by a factor f so that there is no discontinuity at 20 MeV and then stored as a Mod type 13 pre modification Once the collection of pre modifications is complete these can be implemented by generating the Final database This is done by clicking the Reaction data Generate Final database using preliminary mods menu item If Final already contains data then a confirmation dialog similar to that shown in Figure
103. Long Number Double SAFEPAQ II Size Size o BK Size Size o BKxNA Size Size o ANA Size Size oAaANA Size Size o ANA User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 193 Group 315V Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Group number Number Long 4 Cross section Number Double 8 Group315V Source Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source ID Number Integer 2 Group number Number Long 4 Cross section Number Double 8 Group 315W Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Group number Number Long 4 Cross section Number Double 8 Group 315W Source Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source ID Number Integer 2 Group number Number Long 4 Cross section Number Double 8 Group 351F Link Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Group number Number Long 4 Cross section Number Double 8 Group351F Source Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source ID Number Integer 2 Group number Number Long 4 Cross section Number Double 8 Interpolation Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Range number Number Integer 2 Range limit Number Long 4 Interpolation law Number Integer 2 Reaction Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source Text 50 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 Multiplicity Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 QM Nu
104. Na 23 n d i aana Mod in Mg24 v ini v ose State Multiplicity QM gl LR NR NP 2 amp 95930E 06 6 95930E 06 0 1 3045 2 6 95930E 06 6 48714E 06 0 1 3045 Figure 82 The Data selection window The lists of targets and reactions shown in the Targets and sources window Figure 67 are shown by default and refer to normal plots If the Visualisation Extended plots menu item in the main window Figure 2 is checked then only those targets which have the full range of summed reactions with MT gt 200 present are shown Similarly the number of reactions is different and refer to the summed reactions such as n xp n a and one termed Multiple The latter refers to the reactions n y n p nd n t n h n a n 2n n 3n and n n a When the Plot button in Figure 67 is clicked then a series of cross section curves are plotted Experimental data symbols are shown for each reaction type and if EXFOR data are overplotted then separate colours refer to data for the various reaction types If the Visualisation Extended plots use n n p not n g menu item in the main window Figure 2 is checked then in the multiple plot case data for the reaction n n p rather than n y are displayed These extended plots are very useful for comparing several reaction types and investigating relationships between them An example of such a plot for x nx reactions on W is shown in Figure 83
105. O n2nh O indi 9 inna O nun a 2nhedt n n a Figure 58 The EXFOR reaction type window for n n a Note that if a summed reaction is chosen in Figure 54 Figure 58 then the data are saved as a reaction with an MT gt 200 However they will be displayed on plots of reactions of both the summed and the base reaction For example if data are saved for reaction type n a then on plots of both n a and n a the saved EXFOR data will be displayed Clicking on the Plot button in Figure 51 displays the EXFOR plot window shown in Figure 59 Figure 59 shows the data points for the selected data source There are no options for changing axes types or scales and it is designed just to enable a quick look at the data However the graph can be printed to the default printer or copied to the clipboard by selecting the File Print or Edit Copy menu items Returning to Figure 49 it is possible to plot all the data sets that have been selected and saved in the EXFOR database by clicking the Plot all button This displays the EXFOR master plot window shown in Figure 60 It is possible to change axes types but the window is designed just to enable a quick look at the data By default the data are plotted with Lin Lin axes but by clicking on the Options Log Log axes menu item the graph is replotted with Log Log axes Clicking the Options Lin Lin axes menu item replots the graph with Lin Lin axes The graph can be pri
106. PAQ II Law 4 E 2 J E E cef Bap C ua zi E B E _C Af BE BE ri k e for B 0 TM ER 22 Ce E E for B 0 Law 5 e Ce E JG Ey Ce E ag Ae pee E B 1 E Oe Toa pBH en Ej Jfor B Oand B 1 T 23 e Ce E F for B 0 Ce In E E for B 1 1 E weighting Using equation 4 for the weighting and each interpolation law in term yields the following expressions for the multi group cross section J Note that these are the same formulae as used in the calculation of the resonance integral Law1 E dE E JG Ej Co 5 Co IC Ej E2 je E 1 GP aaea a es 24 Law 2 E A BE JEp cf LABE macine CAE E E E E 25 CAIn C o 0 E Law 3 Using the standard integral A2 E A BIE E 2 JB E C ws P dE CAIn callie E CA In E5 In CB In E In E In E In E 26 AC o o In 42 E CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 203 Law 4 Law 5 E BE JG E Ce f zl Q7 1 Using the standard result shown in equation A3 and defining E 5 by equation 28 the final expression is given in 29 E n aE Ly Ej 0 Du 28 JURE ye co p NS E3 B noit Rt ied 29 E A P J E E3 cet f ETE Se jer E B E A E EP for B 0and B 1 Ce E E for B 1 Ce In E E for B 0 Maxwellian thermal weighting Law 1
107. SPACT user tool in S UKAEA SAFEPAQ4I Idea The MT gt 200 sums for the reactions 203 207 such as n xa did UKAEA SAFEPAQ4I Idea When displaying Cache there is a horizontal scroll bar which is n UKAEA SAFEPAQ4I Idea Need to produce a p induced library capability need to be adde UKAEA SAFEPAG I Document Wanted analysis plots to show some discussed points with differ UKAEA SAFEPAGQ4I Document pening the Validation window from the Menu or Toolbar needs UKAEA FISPACT Discussion Raul suggests that FISPACT should be able to use specific Fre iv CCFE Fusion Figure 172 The List entries window It is important to keep track of the users of EASY so that for instance they can be notified of new versions PC users also require a serial number and password during installation A database of users is only available to the developer of the code system R A Forrest in another Access database Users_ mdb held in the Extra folder Clicking the Tools Users menu item displays a submenu containing the items New user and Edit user Clicking the New user menu item displays the New user window shown in Figure 173 Enter details of the user and whether the version of EASY is an internal one or a commercial sale Select the EASY versions and types and then click the Add button to store the information in the database following a confirmation dialog Clicking the Close button closes the window New us
108. Single Number Integer Number Integer Number Single Number Single Number Single Number Single Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Integer Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Text Number Double Number Double Text Number Double Text Text SAFEPAQ II Size 0 0000 A Size Size eo an oo User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 183 DeltaQ Number Double 8 Decaydata sources Name Type Size Source Text 50 Header Number Integer 2 Details Name Type Size Name Text 50 Description Text 255 Start Mod Number Long 4 PreModMaxAddnum Number Long 4 DecayDB Yes No 1 MasterDB Yes No 1 FoundPM Yes No 1 FinalDB PM Yes No 1 AdjacentTable Yes No 1 FoundM BR Yes No 1 FoundM Exp Yes No 1 FoundM Sys Yes No 1 FoundM Zero Yes No 1 FoundM 20 Yes No 1 FoundM Thresh Yes No 1 FoundM LowE Yes No 1 FoundM NonThresh Yes No 1 FoundM Suspect Yes No 1 FinalDB M Yes No 1 Calc Summary Yes No 1 Calc 069 Yes No 1 Calc 100 Yes No 1 Calc 172 Yes No 1 Calc 175 Yes No 1 Calc 211 Yes No 1 Calc 315 Yes No 1 Calc 351 Yes No 1 Calc Uncert Yes No 1 Write GXS Yes No 1 Write XS Yes No 1 Write UN Yes No 1 Elements Name Type Size Z Number Intege
109. User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 98 SAFEPAQ II 110 is displayed prior to deleting any data Generating Final involves copying all the data from Master to Final and then implementing the pre modifications It takes a reasonably short time 10 mins to carry out this step It is now possible to find the main set of modifications These are generated by comparing data for each reaction in Final with information in Parameter Although it is possible to find these modifications in a series of steps using items on the Reaction data Find modifications sub menu it is preferrable to automate this by clicking on the Reaction data Automate processing menu item or the twenty sixth toolbar button This displays the Automate processing window shown in Figure 117 Automate processing C Compact databases C Delete all pre modification entries Delete all modification entries C Find all PEG EH and Q value pre modifications C Generate Final database using C Prepare Adjacent cross section table Find all branching modifications Find all experimental modifications Find all systematics modifications Find all repeated zero modifications Find all greater than 60 MeV modifications Find all threshold modifications using Wapstra Find all gt 1E 5 eV non threshold modifications Find all non threshold first point modifications C Find all suspect interpolation laws C Generate Final database using Int
110. Validation plot window User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 120 SAFEPAQ II Cel Validation data WJ oes 2 reactions EZE Ratio range 6 3096E 01 7 9433E 01 P 31 n 2n P 30 0 73862 Final database Ra 226 n 2n Ra 225 0 79363 Source ADL 3 History Data merge Renormalise to experiment Value 1 11416E D0 b Energy 1 46400E 0 eV Experiment Source Katoh T K Kawade H Yamamoto JAERI M 89 083 1983 Value 1 32000E 0 b Energy 1 46400E 0 eV Exact C E at correct energy 0 84406 Score 4 Experimental data View pre modifications View modifications CCFE Fusion Figure 134 Validation data window Figure 134 can be used to investigate reactions with discrepant C E values Clicking the Visualisation button copies the selected reaction s data to the Cache if these are not already present and displays the Targets and sources window Figure 67 with the appropriate target and reaction selected It is then possible to plot the data in the normal manner Clicking the Experimental data button will open the appropriate Experimental data window Figure 30 Figure 35 and select the correct target It is then possible to either change which experimental data are used or to add another entry Clicking the View pre modifications button will open the Preliminary modifications window Figure 111 so that these can be checked Because it is likely that no
111. a 117 Write EAF_GXS files 126 Write EAF_XS file 127 Write EAF LIN File 127 Reaction list 126 Source table 127 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPA Q II 173 Decay data Tools Log Help AE Nuclide list Ctrl N 12 Global source replace 14 Sources 13 A Known A2 data 15 A Known hazard data 14 Known clearance data 15 Find nuclides with unknown spin 16 m Assemble decay data 16 Decay data viewer Ctrl D 17 Documentation 16 Tools Log Help Create Compare database 154 BB Compare gt See k Compare with previous EAF library 165 view external Log 164 Change target isomeric state 146 ie Cross section analysis 129 E Generate cross section data 138 Calculate Q value 142 Calculate systematics 143 FISPACT gt Seel SA Final uncertainties 128 ER Reactions For daughter 128 4f Write library as XML 149 Linked tables 167 Update databases 148 je Repair databases 147 Repair Final 147 im Convert UNIX PC type files 149 View elements 144 View MT numbers 145 View Modification types 146 Helpdesk gt See m Users Seen User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 174 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion k Reaction sources 155 References 155 Experimental data flags 156 New experimental data 156 Systematics data flags 157 New systematics Flags 157 Remo
112. a source and Quality score for the two libraries CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 165 Compare with previous EAF library d Reaction H lin g H 2 A Source Premods Mods Summary H 2 n 2n H 1 H 2 n g H 3 H 3 n 2n H 2 H 3 n 3n H 1 EAF 2007 External He 3 n q He 4 He 3 n p H 3 Source EFF 2 4 He 3 n d H 2 He 4 n 2n He 3 Quality score 4 Li 6 n 2na H 1 Li 6 n n d He 4 Li 6 n q Li 7 Li 6 n p He 6 EAF 2009_3 Internal Li 6 n t He 4 Li 7 n 2n Li 6 Source JENDL 3 3 Li n n a H 3 p Li 7in 2na H 2 Quality score 4 Li 7 n n p He 6 Li 7 n g Li 8 Li 7 n d He 6 vw Figure 195 The Compare with previous EAF library window Tab 1 SAFEPAQ II The External database must correspond to the previous EAF library Currently External is in I XSafepaq DotNetiSafepaq 2007 new Is this correct do you wish to continue Figure 196 The confirmation dialog prior to comparing with previous EAF library The second tab is displayed by clicking on the Premods tab the result is shown in Figure 197 This shows details of the pre modifications applied to the two libraries The third tab is displayed by clicking on the Mods tab the result is almost identical to Figure 197 except that modifications for the two libraries are shown The fourth tab is displayed by clicking on the Summary tab the result is shown in Figure 198 This show
113. al v O Mass A Reaction n2 ie Number Z Asymmetry s Min energy O O00E 00 eV Include width data rd raacion y axis 9 None Maximum cross section O n np Energy at maximum O inf Width at maximum Skewness parameter Split Score Threshold Min s 0 0 Max s 0 s Cross section at 14 5 MeV Cross section at 20 MeV Cross section at 30 MeV Cross section at 60 MeV Figure 144 The Cross section analysis window By default the Maximum cross section radio button is selected in the y axis group and any of the first five options actually causes the data for all five options to be collected this process is quite time consumming and may take several minutes Selecting any of the remaining options causes data at the specified energy to be collected this is typically much quicker Note that if one of the Cross section at energy options is chosen then the label of the Min energy textbox changes to Delta energy referring to the interval about the specified energy that is used to average data This is important in cases where no data point exists at the specified energy By default the Mass A radio button in the x axis group is selected If the Maximum cross section radio button is selected in the y axis group then the 2nd reaction group is enabled and data for the selected reaction are added to the primary reaction This is important in the case of n 2n where at h
114. an also be displayed by clicking the File Compact databases menu item or the third toolbar button f Compact databases Parameter 259 5 MB Timer Master 259 8 MB C Final 1507 4 MB C Library 99 0 MB C Cache 287 0 MB C EXFOR 11 8 MB C Test 0 7 MB Remove temporary files when compacted Clear Master database before compacting Clear Final database before compacting Clear Test database before compacting OOO Figure 4 The Compact databases window Check the Parameter Master Final Cache and Test options and click the Compact button This will cause the selected databases to be compacted and the new sizes will be shown In this case there will be a very significant reduction At later stages of use compacting a large database that is not empty can take significant time Check the Timer option if you want the elapsed time to be displayed in the main window status bar If a database is full of data that are no longer required then tick the appropriate Clear lt Name gt database before compacting check box to speed up the compacting Note that the size of User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 7 Final includes both final mdb and if it exists final add mdb see Appendix 2 for database details If it is required to switch to a different existing EAF project then this can be done by changing the location of the SAFEPAQ CII databases in the SAFEPAQ folder text box in the Settings w
115. ar button to display the EXFOR sources window shown in Figure 49 A target nuclide is entered Note that no isomeric targets are present in EXFOR and a reaction selected from the dropdown list Clicking the Sources button will display information on the available sources The year of the experiment is given in the first column indicates that the data have already been selected in the EXFOR database Under the Type column are a series of codes defined in the EXFOR documentation but in addition if the final state 1s given in the file then the symbols gt g gt m or gt n are used to indicate g m n states respectively The Lab codes energies and the number of points are also shown Selecting a particular source causes a ToolTip to be displayed which shows the Full User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 37 Access number e g 40306 002 of the entry this is a number that can be useful if the particular data file is required on the CD ROM EXFOR sources Date Type Lab code E low fe Ehigh eV Points Target amp g 107 Ag 108m format Reaction ng vi View index 1938 SPA PCF38 012 2 200E 05 2 200E 05 2 1940 SPA KFT40 018 2 000E 05 2 000E 05 1 a 1946 LAS46 002 3 000E 03 5 900E 06 8 1946 4MXW LAS46 003 2 500E 02 2 500E 02 1 1947 MMW ANL47 066 2 500E 04 2 500E 04 1 1947 SPA ANL47 072 2 500E 04 2 500E 04 1 1948 SPA OXF48 014 1 300E 07 1 300E 07 2 1949 OXF49 0
116. arch 2010 CCFE Fusion 20 CCFE Fusion SAFEPAQ II Library options Source ID ADL 3 Database folder adl 3 Conversion options C Strict ENDF ADL 3 C JENDL C EAF C IEAF xv C ANITA group data Version 6 Database name adl3 mdb C MF4 C MFE6 high E data C MF32 C MF33 C 1 material per file Header FEND MEND IP neutron Browse New C Derived data C MF2 ADL 3 TEND xD Figure 24 The Library options window The options for the existing sources are shown by a series of check boxes in the Conversion options group The various sources can be displayed by clicking on the gt gt gt and lt lt buttons source details can be removed by clicking the Delete button Note that deleting does not remove the basic data which are held in a database for the library but only the details about the source which are held in the Library database The Browse button displays the Open dialog that allows the database location to be specified Some degree of experimentation will be necessary to select the various Conversion options These specify the type of file ENDF version EAF ADL JENDL IEAF XY table ANITA group data or with derived data what types of data are present MF 2 4 6 32 33 if there is a header line if the various ENDF end lines are present FEND MEND and TEND and whether the file or files contains more that one mater
117. ated View High energy factors TALYS data scaled by f above 20 MeV before merging View all reactions with f differing from 1 by gt thanafactor 10 Factor f 288 reactions Reaction Source Li B n g Li 7 JENDL 32 1 00E 06 Li G n t He 4 IRDF 2002 1 00E 06 Li 7 n djHe 6 ENDF B VI 8 1 00E 06 All sources Be 3 n g Be 10 KOPECKY 2000 amp 11E 04 B 10fn g B 11 JENDL 3 2 E 20E 02 B Tl n g B 12 JEF 2 2 1 94E 03 B 11 n d Be 10 JENDL 3 3 1 00E 06 v Figure 115 The View High energy factors window CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 97 The change of data source to TALYS for reactions with large factors can be done automatically by clicking the Reaction data Change data source to TALYS for all reactions with large f menu item This finds all reactions where f gt 100 and the data source is not TALYS and then changes it to TALYS data from the data source given in the Version of TALYS text box in the Settings window Figure 1 In the discussion of the Preliminary modifications window Figure 111 the purpose of the Switch button was given In order to identify reactions with multiple Mod type 13 modifications click the Reaction data Find reactions with multiple data merges menu item this displays the Reactions with multiple data merges window shown in Figure 116 Each reaction can then be investigated in turn Reactions with multiple data merges 166 reactions
118. b UseV 55 reactions JUKO 0 0253 3 32000E 01 2 00000E 03 Tue EAF99 14500000 1 35000E 02 6 27000E 03 False JUKO 0 0253 5 30000E 02 6 00000E 03 True JUKO 0 0253 1 10000E 00 1 00000E 01 True gas 14500000 7 00000E 03 1 50000E 03 False EAFS7 14500000 1 52000E 02 8 00000E 04 True EAF97 14500000 3 82200E 01 2 50000E 01 True EAF21 14500000 1 11320E400 2 12000E 01 True CCFE Fusion Figure 179 The Compare new experimental data window Clicking the Tools Compare Systematics data flags sub menu item displays the Compare systematics data flags window shown in Figure 180 This shows reactions where there are differences in the usage flags for systematics The values of the UseR and UseB fields in the External and Internal databases are shown The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 157 a Compare systematics data flags E Reaction E UseB EUseR UseB IUseR reactions Figure 180 The Compare systematics data flags window Clicking the Tools Compare New systematics flags sub menu item displays the Compare new systematics flags window shown in Figure 181 This shows reactions where there are new systematics data flags in the External database The values of the UseR and UseB fields in the External database are shown The contents of the grid can be copied or print
119. ber Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Cross section 30keV Number Double 8 Systematics Number Double 8 SystematicsSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Cross section 14MeV Number Double 8 Systematics Number Double 8 Systematics alt Number Double 8 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 179 Target Name Type Size Target number Number Integer 2 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 TotalLibrarySummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Cross section thermal Number Double 8 Cross section 30keV Number Double 8 Cross section 14MeV Number Double 8 Resonance Integral Number Double 8 TotalReaction Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 Multiplicity Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 4 The definition of the library mdb database tables Elements Name Type Size Z Number Integer 2 Symbol Text 2 MTvalues Name Type Size MT Number Integer 2 Reaction name Text 7 RawData Name Type Size Source Text 50 Database name Text 50 Path Text 100 Strict ENDF Yes No 1 ADL 3 Yes No 1 JENDL Yes No 1 EAF Yes No 1 XY Table Yes No 1 Version
120. ber of the selected fitting option Clicking the Close button closes the window Note that in some cases the selected fitting options can give an extremely unphysical curve The importance of reactions has been mentioned several times in the description of the Analysis tool Further information about both the important nuclides and reactions can be found by clicking on the Tools FISPACT Importance summaries menu item which displays the Importance summaries window shown in Figure 153 By default this shows the Primary nuclides from the EASY 2007 analysis If there are results from a new analysis to read in then in the case of nuclides click the Read nuclides button to read from the ImportanceSummaryl txt file which was generated by a series of FISPACT calculations The left hand list box shows the Primary nuclides there are 447 of them for EASY 2007 Selecting the Secondary radio button will instead show the Secondary nuclides Selecting a nuclide in the left hand list box will display the Elements for which this is a primary nuclide in the right hand list box for Be 7 there are five elements e Importance summaries m Analysis done with EASY 2003 EASY 2007 Type Nuclides Nuclides Primary Reactions Secondary Primary nuclides 447 Elements 5 is aj c He 6 N Be 7 F Be 11 c i Y Figure 153 Importance summaries window Nuclides User manuat Issue 8 March 201
121. by clicking the Save button if the change is not required then click the Cancel button A new data point can be added by clicking the Add button This displays the dialog shown in Figure 31 asking if the new data point is for the selected target and reaction If the Yes button is clicked then the editing boxes User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 26 SAFEPAQ II used in the modification process are used If the No button is clicked then the Add 30 keV experimental data window very similar to that shown in Figure 32 is displayed Note that the flags must be chosen so that either none or only a single data point is used for branching renormalisation or validation However if duplicates are present then the last entered Yes value is retained any existing Yes is automatically changed to No i 30 keV experimental data Targets Reactions He ing Energy eV Cross section b DeltaX sec b UseB UseR UseV Li P 3 000000E 04 1 540000E 05 1 000000E 06 No No Yes ap C44 N 14 aE Bao ZY et al Atomic Data and Nuclear tables 75 2000 1 019 BAD x 3000000E 04 1 540000E 0 1 000000E06 C CCFE Fusion Figure 33 The 30 keV experimental data window The data available at 14 5 MeV can be displayed by clicking on Experimental data View 14 5 MeV data or the twelfth toolbar button to display the 14 5 MeV experimental data window shown in Figure
122. by factor Renorm by lin energy BR m Pre equilibrium addition Renormalise to systematics Modification of Q value Renormalise by factor v Figure 138 The REPORT window The tasks that now remain are to write out the Final data in EAF format Clicking the Reaction data Write EAF files Write EAF GXS files submenu item displays the Write EAF GXS files window shown in Figure 139 At the beginning of each EAF group file there is a 16 line header giving information about the library The header for each group file can be created or modified in this window Select the required Group file type radio button and then save the header by clicking the Save header button The headers are stored in the ascii folder on the disk shown in the Source database disk text box in the Settings window Figure 1 Clicking the Write all GXS files button will create the files in the folder cross section on the Source database disk and Cross section data folder specified in the Settings window Figure 1 The files have names such as ea gxs 175v indicating the group structure and weighting this takes about 2 hours User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 126 SAFEPAQ II Write EAF GXS files Edit the header lines used at the beginning of the group file Note that lines must be no longer than shown in the box de de de de de dede de de de dede de de de dede de dede dede de de de dede de dede dede de dede dede de
123. c AM CENT F ON ENER H I uod RE G Y EASY Documentation Series CCFE R 10 03 L W Packer and R A Forrest SAFEPAQ 11 User manual Enquiries about copyright and reproduction should in the first instance be addressed to the Culham Publications Officer Culham Centre for Fusion Energy CCFE Library Culham Science Centre Abingdon Oxfordshire OX14 3DB UK CCFE is the fusion research arm of the United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority which is the copyright holder EASY Documentation Series CCFE R 10 03 SAFEPAQ II User manual L W Packer R A Forrest EURATOM CCFE Fusion Association Culham Science Centre Abingdon Oxfordshire OX14 3DB UK AEA Nuclear Data Section Wagramer Strasse 5 PO Box 100 1400 Vienna Austria Q ISO 9001 ISO 14001 Abstract SAFEPAQ II is the software tool that has been developed to enable efficient production of the EAF nuclear data libraries that are required as input to the FISPACT activation code It forms part of the European Activation System EASY and replaces SAFEPAQ and SYMPAL that were used previously SAFEPAQ II enables all the nuclear data to be stored in relational databases Access and by using an interactive user interface allows the data to be viewed modified analysed validated and then produced in the required EAF format as text files It was originally written in Visual Basic 5 running under the Windows NT4 operating system The cur
124. ccess Number Long 4 Point number Number Long 4 Energy Number Double 8 Delta energy Number Double 8 Cross section Number Double 8 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 195 Delta cross section Number Double 8 Private Reaction Name Type Size ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 Full access Number Long 4 FS Number Long 4 MT Number Integer 2 Code Text 6 NP Number Long 4 Date Text 4 Type Text 3 E low Number Double 8 E high Number Double 8 Title Text 100 Authors Text 50 Reference Text 6 Reaction Name Type Size ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 Full access Number Long 4 FS Number Long 4 MT Number Integer 2 Code Text 6 NP Number Long 4 UseP Yes No 1 Factor E Number Double 8 Factor DE Number Double 8 Factor X Number Double 8 Factor DX Number Double 8 ReacCode Name Type Size Code Text 3 MT Number Integer 2 FS Number Integer 2 Reports Name Type Size Code Text 11 Name Text 50 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 196 SAFEPAQ II Appendix 2 Practical details File locations The locations of the various files used by SAFEPAQ II are defined in the Settings window Figure 1 This appendix gives more details of the locations To increase flexibility a special folder termed the Extra folder is used If the folder is Safepaq DotNet all the folders defined in the Settings window are assumed to be in this folder
125. checked and the Save button clicked Depending on the reaction type there are various options when saving the data If the selected reaction is nx then the dialog shown in Figure 53 is displayed One of the radio buttons should be selected and the OK button clicked The original EXFOR data will be saved as data for the reaction specified EXFOR reaction type The n x reaction must be defined Choose a reaction for this data n p O na O Inn O n a Figure 53 The EXFOR reaction type window for n x If the selected reaction is n n p or n d then the dialog shown in Figure 54 is displayed One of the radio buttons should be selected and the OK button clicked The original EXFOR data will be saved as data for the reaction specified User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 40 SAFEPAQ II EXFOR reaction type The reaction must be defined Choose a reaction for this data set np npen p nsp nden d n xd nd n den p n d Figure 54 The EXFOR reaction type window for n d If the selected reaction is n n d or n t then the dialog shown in Figure 55 is displayed One of the radio buttons should be selected and the OK button clicked The original EXFOR data will be saved as data for the reaction specified EXFOR reaction type The reaction must be defined Choose a reaction for this data set O nad n2np nten
126. ching Ratio 1 0E 05 1 0E 04 1 0E 03 1 0E 02 1 0E 01 1 0E 00 1 0E 01 1 0E 02 1 0E 03 1 0E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 06 1 0E 07 1 0E 08 Energy eV pow Final g hos Final m e Experimental data Experimental BR i 2 53000E 02 eV 2 32143E 01 g Figure 78 The Branching ratio visualisation window In the descriptions above the Cache database has been mentioned several times The contents of the Cache can be viewed by clicking the File Cache contents menu item or the second toolbar button in the main window This displays the Cache contents window shown in Figure 79 The data grid shows the reactions that are present clicking to the left of the first column will select a reaction and display it in an easy to read format above the grid The Source of the reaction is shown in the first column The standard ZA and isomeric state values for the target and daughter are shown in the second to fifth columns The ENDF MT reaction code is shown in column six and the number of interpolation ranges NR and number of data points NP are shown in the final two columns CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II e Cache contents File Edit View Be n g Be 8 Source Final TALYS 5 TALYS 5 gt Final EAF 37 0 FENDL A 2 Final Final TALYS 6a TALYS Ba lt lt gt gt ZA target 95243 95243 95243 4007 4007 4007 11024 12024 11024 12024 Close target Z daughter D 0 0 0 0
127. ckground If the Change value of Kind check box is ticked in the Settings window Figure 1 then it is possible to toggle the type by double clicking the coloured box with the mouse This should not normally be necessary and the check box should normally be cleared If the Ext check box is ticked then values of parameters for pre modifications in the External database see page 154 will be displayed in a ToolTip If there User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 88 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion is more than one pre modification then pressing the gt or lt keyboard keys will display the next or previous details For some reactions there may be two data merge Mod type 13 pre modifications present The order of these is important and it may be necessary to reverse them which can be done by selecting the first data merge and then clicking the Switch button Ki Preliminary modifications 2125 reactions Be 9 n a He 6 Low energy 0 00000E 00 eV Be 10 n g Be 11 High M B 10 n n p Be 9 igh energy 0 00000E 00 e B l0in g B 11 Ref energy 1 00000E 05 eV B 10 n p Be 10 B 10 n d Be 9 Value at Ref 0 00000E 00 b Ext B 10 n t Be 8 Factor 1 00000E 08 B 10 n h Li 8 B 10 n a Li 7 gt lt Mod type Change energy value Comment v Delete all Mads for reaction Pit Delete all Mods in Parameter Save Switch Delete Mod Add Mad Close iel tal
128. cking the Save button will write the comment to Parameter A list of all the preliminary modifications can be printed by clicking the Print button If preliminary modifications that were added Ad hoc are available in a previous EAF database then these can be reused so long as data for the reaction in Parameter have not been significantly changed saving a great deal of effort To do this click the Reaction data Process Ad hoc preliminary modifications menu item that displays the Process Ad Hoc Preliminary modifications window shown in Figure 113 The database to be used is shown this is the same as the one selected when comparing with an External database see page 154 Before use it is necessary to click the Check button to ensure that the External Parameter database is sufficiently recent the Kind and Status fields must be present By default the All radio button is selected If the database can be used then the Process button is enabled Clicking this will add all possible Ad Hoc preliminary modifications to the Internal Parameter database Any that cannot be added are listed in the window This list can be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button or printed by clicking the Print button The reactions can be investigated individually and further preliminary modifications added as necessary Afi Process Ad Hoc Preliminary modifications Reaction Database C Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq_2007_new parameter mdb E low E h
129. copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively E ID Reference D references Figure 177 The Compare references window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 156 SAFEPAQ II Reaction B 11 n t Be 3 C 12 n pJB 12 N 15 n g N 16 0 17 n p N 17 0 18 n pJN 18 Si 30fn pJA 30 CH37 n pJ5 37 CH37 n p 5 37 B8 Compare experimental data flags J L Source EUseB E UseR EUseV 1UseB 1UseR lUseV 75 reactions BO85 True False True False True R68 False False True False True JUKO False False True False False ME70 False False True False True QA481 False False True False True SC704 False True True False False auss False True True False False 0481 False False False False True Close Figure 178 The Compare experimental data flags window Clicking the Tools Compare New experimental data sub menu item displays the Compare new experimental data window shown in Figure 179 This shows reactions where there are new data sets in External that are not present in Internal and the values that are in External The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively 6a Compare new experimental data J Reaction H 1 n glH 2 D 1 7 n p N 17 Ma 24 n a Ma 25 Ca 48 n g Ca 43 Fe 58 n p Mn 58 Zn B8 n p Cu 58 zZn 7 n 2n n 53g Zn T n 2njZn 53 Source Energy ev XS b Delta XS
130. cription of the menu item can be found are given to the right of each menu item File Visualisation EXFOR Experimen j ts New EAF project 5 E Project properties 1 1 1B Data selection Ctrl S 65 ow Cache contents Ctrl C 6 1 a Compact databases Ctrl Oo 6 dj Status 7 Gy Timer 10 Printer setup 9 Page setup 1 0 iz Settings 4 Exit Visualisation EXFOR Experimental data Intec Extended plots 65 Extended plots use n n p not n g 65 Extended plots multiple targets 65 EAF name not Final in Legend 49 Q Targets and sources Ctrl T 47 A Scrap editor Ctrl E 57 ba Create n g scrap using SRA Ctrl G 58 hA Create n F scrap using SRA Ctrl K 58 EXFOR Experimentaldata Integre e EXFOR sources Ctrl X 37 List EXFOR entries 46 tcd Assemble book 46 Add Private data 45 Delete EXFOR data 45 amp EXFOR lab codes 46 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 169 View References Experimentaldata Integral data View 0 0253 eV data View 30 keV data View 14 5 MeV data View RI data Systematics Libraries Reaction data E Plot experimental data Elemental analysis View systematics Flags View non threshold uncertainty data Find reactions with no non threshold uncertainty data View threshold uncertainty data Find r
131. cross section value Xref at Eref is added Xref Ever 17 An existing modification of type Addnum with parameters given by Elow Ehigh Eref Xref fact is not used 18 Current data in the range E lt E are removed and replaced with the additional data given in Addnum which covers the energy range from 1 x 10 eV E 4 The interpolation law is Int fact and the number of new data point is in Xref New data 19 All data points have energy value increased by Eref User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 In Figure 111 clicking the Delete all Mods for reaction button removes all preliminary modifications for the reaction from the database Note that this method of deleting actually removes the modification rather than by inserting a Mod type 17 modification It is possible to remove all preliminary modifications by clicking the Delete all Mods in Parameter button It is possible to see the effect of modifications on a CCFE Fusion 94 SAFEPAQ II reaction by clicking the Test Mods button This copies data from the Master to Test database and carries out the modifications The cross section can then be visualised in the normal way by copying the data to Cache It is possible to add a comment so that details of the added modification can be noted To do this select the pre modification and either type a comment or select an existing one using the dropdown list Cli
132. ction data Check Multiplicities in reaction list menu item displays the Check multiplicities in reaction list window shown in Figure 109 Select one of the radio buttons specifying the multiplicity to test and then click the Get reactions button to display a list of reactions for which the multiplicity is incorrect The list can be printed out by clicking the Print button and placed on the clipboard by clicking the Copy button User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 86 CCFE Fusion SAFEPAQ II bA Check muliplicities in reaction list m D reactions with wrong multiplicity Multiplicity Get reactions Copy Close Figure 109 The Check multiplicities in reaction list window A fourth check that can be carried out further checks that all the multiplicities are correct Clicking the Reaction data Check Multiplicities in reaction nuclide lists menu item displays the Check multiplicities in reaction nuclide lists window which is identical to Figure 108 except that the text reads reactions with multiplicity lt gt number FS Click the Get reactions button to display a list of reactions for which the multiplicity is incorrect The list can be printed out by clicking the Print button and placed on the clipboard by clicking the Copy button Having decided on the reactions and their sources the next step is to construct the Master database This is done by clicking on the Reactio
133. ction to display the uncertainty data These data cannot be changed until the Modify button is clicked Then click on the Save button to save the change to the Parameter database If the change is not required then click the Cancel button Data for a reaction can be removed from the database by clicking the Delete button To add new uncertainty data click the Add button which displays the Add non threshold uncertainty window shown in Figure 37 UN Non threshold uncertainty data Targets Reactions Pa234 nf U 230 n a U 231 n a EY 1 00000E 01 eV U 232 U 233 ERE 1 00000E 05 eV 234 En E20 200000407 eV U 236 4 L 237 DeltaV 1 00000E 01 U 238 DeltaH 1 00000E 01 U 240 m Tel i Delta20 3 00000E 01 i p Np235 m Delta60 5 00000E 01 Figure 36 The Non threshold uncertainty data window In Figure 36 the four three for a non extended library Delta values are shown Delta A is defined as Ao o where Ao is the uncertainty in cross section and the error factor f is defined as f 1 A Note that the 20 MeV energy is shown explicitily this is the default value but another value such as 30 MeV can be used if required User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 29 In Figure 37 enter the target in the first text box select the reaction from the dropdown list and enter the seven six for a non extended library required values in the remaining text b
134. data can be inspected Reactions with incorrect ModType17 pre 25 reactions N 15 n q N 16 s Ni 58 n p Co 58g Ni 58 n p Co 58m Ni 59 n q Ni 60 Figure 114 The Reactions with incorrect ModType 17 pre modifications window The major difference for an extended energy library is that data are required between 20 and 60 MeV A large number of reactions have been added from TALYS using the Add new reactions window Figure 104 but those already present in say EAF 2003 need to be extended to 60 MeV This can be done automatically using data from TALYS by clicking the Reaction data Find all high energy data merge pre modifications Find all gt 20 MeV data merge TALYS pre modifications menu item This searches through the reaction list and for each reaction with no data gt 20 MeV checks if such data exist in TALYS If so then the data are extracted scaled by a factor f so that there is no discontinuity at 20 MeV and then stored as a Mod type 13 pre modification For the preparation of the EAF 2007 deuteron induced library it was necessary to extend a set of reactions above 50 MeV This was done by clicking the Reaction data Find all high energy User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 96 SAFEPAQ II data merge pre modifications Find all gt 50 MeV data merge TALYS pre modifications menu item For reactions where the threshold is close to 20 MeV the factor required to smoot
135. data window Returning to the main SAFEPAQ II window Figure 2 Clicking the second item on the EXFOR menu List EXFOR entries displays the List EXFOR entries window shown in Figure 65 Select a reaction type from the dropdown list and click the Get entries button to display all the reactions stored for the given reaction type with the Final state FS g m n or blank for a total and the Lab code The number of entries is shown By default the standard EXFOR entries are displayed but by clicking the Private option in the Type group the Private EXFOR entries can be listed User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 46 SAFEPAQ II e EXFOR lab codes County UNITED KINGDOM iv Code UK Code Laboratory details EE Engl Elec Co Wheatstone Leics GLS Univ of Glasgow Glasgow Scotland HAR AERE Harwell Berks England E HHL M R C Cyclotron Unit Hammersmith Hospital London IST Imp Coll of Sci Techn London KEN Univ of Kent Canterbury England LEE Univ of Leeds Leeds England LON Univ of London London England Figure 64 The EXFOR lab codes window List EXFOR entries c l Type Reaction n2 vw Standard Target FS Lab code O Private Rb 85 MOH82 m Close Kr 78 GIT68 1976 entries Kr 78 LRL89 Kr 80 m GIT68 Kr 80 GIT68 Kr 80 LRL89 Kr 82 m GIT68 Kr 86 m GIT68 Rb 85 HAM68 Rb 85 IBJ76 Figure 65 The L
136. ding on the stage of processing that has been reached the two Add data to lt Name gt databases check boxes should be ticked or cleared User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQM II 81 7 Add reaction Target Co 55 Ag 108m format Reaction n2nd LI Ask Source TALYS Ba SIGECN MASGAM TALYS 5 TALYS 5a TALYS 6 TALYS Ba WIND iv Multiplicity 1 s Final state Og Om On Total Add data to Master database Add data to Final database Add Figure 102 The Add reaction window If the reaction does not exist in the selected data source then the most sensible alternative will be used if possible by default Thus if the reaction is n d and only n n p d data exists in the source then data for this reaction will be used If the Ask check box is checked then a dialog will confirm this Clicking the Delete button in Figure 100 removes the reaction from the ReacSummary table in the Parameter database The tasks of adding and deleting reactions and changing the data source for an existing reaction are common during library preparation There are several ways of achieving these tasks in SAFEPAQ II and the following recommendations are made for carrying them out efficiently Prior to the generation of Master and Final is the best time to add or delete reactions and the Reaction list window Figure 100 is the best place to do this The data source can also be changed
137. e saving by clicking the Add button Prior to EAF 2005 systematics flags were only set for Final state Total If flags to isomeric states are specified then when used the branching ratio systematic is also applied so that for example a renormalistaion can be made to systematics for an isomeric state P Add systematics flags Target C2 Ag 108m format Reaction ng v L 145MeV data 30 keV UseB O UseR Add Final state Og Om On Tota Figure 44 The Add systematics flags window In Figure 43 if the selected reaction is n y then additional data for the 30 keV systematic are displayed These can be modified in the same way as the 14 5 MeV flags and in Figure 44 check boxes for these additional flags are displayed if the reaction is n y Note that as the Use B flag is never used it should always remain unchecked In Figure 44 this is made explicit as the Use R check box is renamed 14 5 MeV data The formulae for the systematics are discussed in the EAF 2010 documentation 10 For the n t n d n n p and n n p d User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 33 reactions an alternate set of formulae have been defined The choice between the two set can be made by selecting Standard or Alternate on the Experimental data Systematics menu item Note that this choice remains until changed and so applies to all calculation or use of systematics Clicking the Experimental da
138. e About SAFEPAQ II window Figure User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 150 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion 8 Keeping track of bugs and requests for new features is important and a feature to do this has been added for EASY 2007 In addition other parts of EASY also need to have bugs and new features recorded This feature is only available for the developer of the code system R A Forrest Another Access database Helpdesk mdb is held in the Extra folder Clicking the Tools Helpdesk menu item displays a submenu containing the items New Edit and List entries Clicking the New Person menu item displays the New person window shown in Figure 169 Select a Title from the dropdown list and enter details in the text boxes Clicking the Save button stores the information in the Helpdesk mdb database following a confirmation dialog and clicking the Close button closes the window s Person m Title Dr v Firstname Jura Surname Kopecky Organisation JUKO Figure 169 The New person window Clicking the New Entry menu item displays the New entry window shown in Figure 170 Select one of the already defined people from the Person dropdown list The type of entry is selected from the Type dropdown list FISPACT SAFEPAQ II User Interface EAF and Documentation are the options The source of the entry is selected from the Source dropdown list Phone e mail Discussion Document Idea a
139. e EAF data files Based on the ideas used in SYMPAL this consists of a number of well defined steps e Construct a list of reactions that are required in the library e Decide on the source of data for each reaction e Compile data from these sources into the Master database e Based on the experimental data and systematics held in the Parameter database construct a set of modifications which when applied to the data in Master produce the data in the Final database User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 79 e Use Final to produce a summary of each reaction thermal 30 keV 14 5 MeV and 20 MeV cross sections and the resonance integral e Produce the multi group data stored in Final e Produce the uncertainty data stored in Final e Carry out internal validation against the data held in Parameter Validation plots e Write out the point wise group wise and uncertainty files in EAF format e Produce the various items of documentation REPORT file and reaction list Each of these steps is accomplished by using items on the Reaction data menu they are all described below Clicking the Reaction data Reaction list menu item or the twenty second toolbar button displays the Reaction list window shown in Figure 100 Enter an element symbol in the first text box and click the Get data button to show the nuclides for the entered element in the Targets list box Select a target and all the reactions along with the exis
140. e Save as mods button will find a set of modifications Mod type 4 for the correct energy ranges and store them in Parameter It will also remove from the Test database the current reaction This forces the reaction to be remade using the modifications before it can be used again Clicking the Copy GXS button copies the selected data in the lower grid to the clipboard Clicking the Print GXS button prints the entire contents of the lower grid to the default printer Clicking the Copy C E button copies the entire contents of the upper grid to the clipboard In both Figure 94 and Figure 95 there is a Reaction rate button If the one in Figure 94 is clicked then the reaction rate data for the reaction in Final are plotted If the one in Figure 95 is clicked then the data in Test are plotted The graphs are User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 75 displayed in the Reaction rate window shown in Figure 96 What is plotted is shown in equation 3 where the reaction rate in the ith group is shown in terms of the group cross sections o and group fluxes It gives a visual indication of the energies at which the cross section in a particular spectrum contribute significantly to the production of the daughter nuclide This can be used to indicate where changes in the cross section should be made so as to improve the C E value R eh 261 3 x RR Reaction rate m E File Edit Options Fe 56 n p Mn 56 in fng f82h asc
141. e all Mads in Parameter Add Mad Figure 120 The Modifications window The collection of all modifications that have been made can be viewed by clicking the Reaction data View modifications menu item or the twenty fifth toolbar button which displays the Modifications window shown in Figure 120 The description of this window is exactly the same as following Figure 111 Refer to that text for details Clicking the Add Mod button displays the Add modification window shown in Figure 121 Note that if the Shift key is pressed while clicking the Add Mod button then the details of the currently selected reaction are added to Figure 121 Figure 121 is very similar to Figure 112 the differences are that a wider range of modifications are available in the Mod type dropdown list there is an additional text box to enter a value in the Addnum field and there is a Mid range check box The latter is required because if the modification refers to the mid energy range for a non threshold reaction then it is necessary to store this value for use in branching calculations Note that the boxes that require data are shown in white rather than grey In the case of the 1 v addition Mod type 11 modification it is optional to enter values in the Ref Energy and Value at Ref text boxes If this is done then the 1 v curve will pass through the specified point otherwise it will pass through the point at High energy User manuat Is
142. e from scratch for a particular reaction This can be done using the Scrap editor window shown in Figure 76 This is displayed by clicking on Visualisation Scrap editor or the seventh toolbar button in the main window Figure 2 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II Lf Scrap editor J File Edit view Close 125 ng LowE Energy eV Cross Section b 1 125 n a LowE dat 1 0E 6 1 126_n g_LowE 1 1 00000E 05 2 99396E 05 z ea L owt dat 2 3 20000E 05 1 67372E 05 pon 128 n a Lowl 1 0E 4 1 128 ng LowE dat 3 1 00000E 04 9 46885E 04 Kp 1 130_n g_LowE 4 3 20000 04 5 29485E 04 I 130 n a LowE dat 5 1 00000E 03 2 99807E 04 e I 133n n HiahE v 10E 1 6 3 20000E 03 1 68118E 04 BEN File name 7 1 00000E 02 9 60272E 03 1 0E 1 I126 n a LowE 8 3 20000E 02 5 54115E 03 PEF Interpolation law 5 00000E 02 3 96265E 03 1 0E 3 1 40000E 01 3 12060E 03 Numero dii 2 10000E 01 2 85513E 03 a uL x Add 2 80000E 01 2 78976E 03 v User manual Issue 8 March 2010 Figure 76 The Scrap editor window Existing data scraps can be viewed by selecting the file name in the list box and clicking the File Load menu item a shortcut is to double click the file name This shows the energy and cross section of the points in the data grid the interpolation law in the text box and the number of points A small graph of the data appears on the right of the data grid Data in the grid can
143. e library strong agreement Both differential and integral data exist or only integral data exist and these are not in agreement with the library Differential data are missing and unsatisfactory agreement with integral data Unsatisfactory agreement with differential and integral data Satisfactory agreement with differential and unsatisfactory agreement with integral data Differential data are missing and satisfactory agreement with integral data Unsatisfactory agreement with differential data and satisfactory agreement with integral data Both differential and integral data exist and they are in agreement with the library validation A new feature in EASY 2003 was the addition of a Quality score for each reaction This score indicates whether there are any differential or integral experimental data and whether the data agree with the EAF library For the current version score 5 discrepant data has been subdivided to show the degree of discrepancy Table 4 shows the definitions of the scores The Quality scores for reactions can be viewed by clicking the Reaction data Quality scores menu item which displays CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 1 me 1 the Quality scores window shown in Figure 123 A choice of reactions to view is made by selecting one of the radio buttons in the View reactions group and clicking the Get reactions button The number of reactions is indicated at the top right of the w
144. e second column By clicking on the Enriched radio button it is possible to edit the abundance values to the required values As can be seen from Figure 93 the isotopic value is generally similar to the elemental value but this depends on the actual cross sections for the selected element y Eis Elemental analysis Joe Element Mg Abundance Natural Enriched Spectrum d Be v Reaction nist v Elemental XS 5 4000E 03 1 0000E 03 b Isotopic X5 4 5642E 03 t 98 4523E 04 b Use Isotope Abun Z XS b k 78 8300 3 0538E 03 8 4523E 01 10 0000 7 6505E 03 2 1176E 00 11 0000 3 3573E 03 1 0353E 00 Figure 93 The Elemental analysis window O O O O O O O User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 73 Selecting a data set in Figure 91 stores details of the reaction and writes the reaction name in the main window status bar Closing Figure 91 retains details of the selected reaction and enables the Integral data Integral C E menu item Clicking this displays the Integral C E window shown in Figure 94 the reaction is shown in the title bar This initially shows the same integral data as in Figure 91 but only where the Use flag 1s Yes and if the multi group cross sections have been calculated then the average cross section for the reaction using data in Final are presented with the C E value If the multi group data have not yet been calculated then i
145. e selected point If only the curves are plotted preferrably with the data point symbols shown then clicking on a point will give information about it including the interpolation law in the final pane in the status bar If the plotted curve is from Final and is not a summed reaction then clicking with the left button of the mouse on the status bar brings up a ToolTip showing the source of data User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 52 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion If the plotted data have been produced by a Data merge modification Mod type 13 see Table 2 for details then there may be a discontinuity in the data that requires a further modification Mod type 4 to scale the high energy data so as to end up with continuous data To calculate this factor the following procedure should be used Show the symbols for the data points and click on the last point prior to the discontinuity Note that if experimental data are plotted then it will be necessary to click the twelfth toolbar button to clear the experimental points The information for the selected point is shown in the status bar Using the left mouse button double click on the status bar to bring up a ToolTip showing the factor by which it is necessary to scale the high energy data to achieve continuity This works by using extrapolation using the correct law on the selected and the previous point to predicted the new value at the point above the selected one One rest
146. e tables with an indication of the linked ones If the path is not valid then use the browse button to open the standard Open dialog and select the correct final add mdb on the computer Once this has been done the Change links button is enabled and clicking this will change all the links in final mdb to the new specified location The list box will show which tables have been relinked If the Data source radio button is clicked then a new dropdown list containing the names of all the data sources appears Select the required source and click the Find button to show the location of parameter mdb specified in the links If links do not yet exist for the selected source then a warning message is displayed If the links exist then as in the case of Final discussed above these can be altered by clicking the browse and Change links buttons The window is closed by clicking the Close button Linked tables Final Q Data Linkedtable Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq_2009_3 final_add mdb Tables Group 069 Linked Group 100 Linked Group 172F Linked Group 172V Linked Group 1720 Linked M Figure 199 The Linked tables window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 168 SAFEPAQ II Summary of menu items The menu items that are available on the main SAFEPAQ II window Figure 2 are shown below The page numbers where a des
147. eV 1 47000E 07 eV 2 31000E 01b g Figure 68 The Data visualisation window Clicking the File Save image menu item or the third toolbar button saves the current plot as an image this can then be written to a Word file as a book as described on page 46 Clicking the Options x y axes menu item displays a submenu that shows the four axes combinations fourth seventh toolbar buttons that can be used to plot the data Clicking the Options x y ranges menu item or the eighth toolbar button displays the x y ranges window shown in Figure 69 This shows the current minimum and maximum values on the x and y axes and allows new values to be entered The previous values are stored and can be recalled by clicking the Last button This saves time if the same changes are required on a series of graphs Clicking the Apply button makes the changes The window remains open until closed by clicking the Close button If the plotted data are from Final then this is shown in the legend as for example in Figure 68 However when using the figure in a publication it may be better to show that the data are from the EAF library that Final represents To show the EAF library name in the legend check the Visualisation EAF name not Final in Legend menu item in the main window Figure 2 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 50 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion xl y ranges x minimum 1 000E 07 eV x maximum 6 000E 07 Apply
148. eactions This list can be printed out by clicking the Print button and placed on the clipboard by clicking the Copy button If the Score check box is checked then the search can be refined by specifying a score then only reactions with that score are returned If the Show systematic UseR check box is ticked then the status of this flag is also returned indicates the flag is set that it is cleared and indicates that the reaction has no systematics flag If searching by reaction type then there is an additional option to sort the reactions by target the default or by data source then within that source by User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 84 SAFEPAQ II target To do this click the right hand radio button above the list box If a search by data source is required then click the Source radio button and select the source from the dropdown list Clicking the Get reactions button shows all reactions that fit the criteria the data source and the total number of reactions AY Reaction search Reaction type np v Search by Reaction Source ACTL m O Source Sonar o w Show Systematic UseR flag Score 785 reactions Sortbytarget Initial state Og C 13 n p B 13 TALYS 6a otla O m C 14 n p B 14 IEAF 2001 0 Ne 20 n p F 20 TALYS 6a 0 On Ne 21 n p F 21 TALYS 6a O AI Ne 22 n p F 22 TALYS 6a 0 Na 24 n p Ne 24 TALYS 6a 0 Final stata Mg 24
149. eactions with missing threshold uncertainty data Ctrl F User manual Issue 8 March 2010 Integral data Libraries Reaction data Neutron spectra Average cross sections View Integral data Elemental analysis Extended C E plot Select Source library Libraries Reaction data Decay data Tools Read new library Library search 3 Ea 53 M liil Library summary iig Library options Extract data from MDF Select Source library For validation 24 26 27 28 34 34 32 See a 28 29 30 30 31 67 70 70 12 76 13 78 78 21 23 21 20 23 123 123 124 CCFE Fusion 170 SAFEPAQ II Reaction data Decay data Tools Log Reaction list Ctrl a 79 Global source replace 82 Add new reactions 82 Delete elastic reactions 83 Reaction numbers 83 Reaction search 84 Change data source For score 0 to TALYS For reaction type See b Check Seec Generate Master database 86 View preliminary modifications Ctrl P 88 View modifications Ctrl M 104 Automate processing 98 Find preliminary modifications See d Process Ad hoc preliminary modifications 94 Find reactions with incorrect ModType17 pre modifications 95 Find all high energy data merge pre modifications See e Change data source to TALYS for all reactions with large F 97 Find reactions with multiple data merges 97 Find reactions from TALYS with a data m
150. ed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively ET Compare new systematics flags m og E Reaction UseB UseR reactions Kr B2 n p Br 82g Kr 82 n p Br 82m Ba 130 n p Cs 130 0s 188 n p Re 188g Tm 171 n aJHo 168 Mo S3m n p Nb 33g Mo S33m n p Nb 33m Figure 181 The Compare new systematics flags window Clicking the Tools Compare Removed systematics flags submenu item displays the Compare removed systematics flags window shown in Figure 182 This shows reactions where systematics data flags for a reaction have been removed in the External database The values of the UseR and UseB fields in the Internal database are shown The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 158 ii Compare integral data oO SAFEPAQ II Reaction Use B UseR 4reactions Ba 130 n p Cs 130a False True Ba 130fn p Es 130m Tm 171 n aJHo 168q Tm 171 n aJHo 168m Figure 182 The Compare removed systematics flags window Clicking the Tools Compare Integral data submenu item displays the Compare integral data window shown in Figure 183 This shows reactions where there are differences in the integral data between the Internal and External databases The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively x
151. ed final state e g m and Total may be present allowing g to be calculated If so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental data points for three final states but not the required final state e g g m and Total may be present allowing n to be calculated If so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 4 Remaining branching ratios by systematics storing a Mod type 4 For non threshold reactions the following steps are considered l 2 3 4 Are there experimental data at 0 0253 eV for this final state and the other for a multiplicity 2 reaction If so then calculate the branching ratio at the energy and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental data at 0 0253 eV for this final state and the other two for a multiplicity 3 reaction If so then calculate the branching ratio at the energy and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental data points at 0 0253 eV for two final states but not the required final state e g m and Total may be present allowing g to be calculated If so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental data points at 0 0253 eV for three final states but not the required final state e g g m and Total may be present allowing n to be calculated If so User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 100 SAFEPAQ II 10 11 12
152. ee aeo nenne ebeV ae eoe ee ee ee erO E ee Sea eee eda 199 Interpolation LAWS etis pe rp RO pee pha o beige esso pestes APER tross NP kn PER krri ososi 200 Dawes constant eoe ace t eee cte tecebentts aa a E E etre dieron olus 200 Law 2 limear lineatr eem tet ote e e tee heres 200 Law 3y log Imedr s og re Stoeb Gotan en i di pep e rae 200 Las Ay near lotn nasisira nga toas nia Et de tete deste E 201 Paw lop log ooi e es A NE eem nd N neos i en m s 201 Flat weishtiht uice c cassia cS uke ce awkdiccassatoavcdaniask Dene RCRUM PAS REN AEN RAE Ue P RIEN ERE 201 Tau co au mte aloe ren hen rah U c e Slee Mona es tu d cio n eta uS 201 E p r 201 CIW deus eto IL DI M M LEE d CPU ert cQ D M 201 bos co DELE E EM RON ETE E TN PHA 202 AO tad alui dise o eue E MC e EM AMD MN inue 202 VE veio DNE esesnes k o keine ta iio kesese seeiis ures stoar tose wn ee bue E soost 202 IE m E a Sale ATE 202 du odes ee E eae ae PLA LEE Fu EO 202 bs c M cC PH RA 202 ro T r ARET AA AEE E A E T E a R 203 E uc e akg tat os A a adel cede M 203 Maxwellian thermal weighting e ssessseossecssooesooessoesssesssocssoossoosssoesssesesoossoossos 203 Edu enaa Roc LL a iU a EL dr 203 b ro c CP LR 203 PAW due toldiu A d i uo PM P pM e IER DAL ML Aa 204 Fission spectrum weighting eese eres ee eene eene eene nee en aset ta sete ta set eta se tnnu 205 I px 205 E23 deste uhi tco c mue c De Cols plecti Meca 206
153. een checked Clicking the Options X axis menu item displays a submenu with five entries allowing the x axis range to be selected In Figure 136 the option 0 15 MeV has been checked CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 123 Validation plot Q m File Edit Options 14 5 MeV experimental data n 2n reactions 59FS Ovalues e 86FS 0values e 7FS 0 values 237 FS 0 values 1E 01 1E 00 D A PERSERNAS T Pa es C E Value 1E 01 t 1 0 0 5 0 10 0 15 0 Q value MeV Figure 136 Validation plot Q window The discussion above on validation plots is concerned with data in the current EAF project However it is also useful to be able to view the validation plots for the various data sources especially if the library covers a complete set of reactions This feature was introduced for EASY 2005 To use it a source library is selected by clicking on the Libraries Select Source library for validation menu item which displays the Select Source library window shown in Figure 137 Select Source library Source library used for validation TALYS 5 TALYS 5a TALYS B TALYS 6a M k Figure 137 Select Source library window Selecting the required source and clicking the Select button causes the Libraries Generate summary for lt Source gt library menu item to be enabled Clicking this will generate summary data for the selected sou
154. eference Changes to the data values or the flags can then be made and saved to the database by clicking the Save button A new data point can be added by clicking the Add button This displays the dialog shown in Figure 31 asking if the new data point is for the selected target and reaction If the Yes button is clicked then the editing boxes used in the modification process are used If the No button is clicked then the Add RI experimental data window very similar to that shown in Figure 32 is displayed Note that the flags must be chosen so that either none or only a single data point is used for branching renormalisation or validation However if duplicates are present then the last entered Yes value is retained any existing Yes is automatically changed to No Note that at present no resonance integral data are used for renormalisation or branching CCFE Fusion 28 SAFEPAQ II RE RI experimental data Targets Reactions H 1 ra H 2 ng RI b Delta RI b 1 300000E 01 4 000000E 02 CCFE Fusion Figure 35 The RI experimental data window The uncertainty data for non threshold reactions can be displayed by clicking on Experimental data View non threshold uncertainty data or the fourteenth toolbar button to display the Non threshold uncertainty data window shown in Figure 36 Click on a target to show the reactions present Click on a rea
155. efined in EASY for extended energy libraries The window is closed by clicking the Close button MT numbers 44 n n 2p 45 n n pa 102 in q 103 in p 104 n d 105 c EE 106 i n h 107 n a 108 i n 2a 109 n 3a lll n 2p 112 n pa 113 n t2a 114 n d2a 115 n pd 116 n pt 117 n da 152 n 5n 153 n 6n 154 n 2nt 155 n ta 156 n 4np 157 n 3nd 158 n n da 159 n Znpa M Close Figure 162 The MT numbers window The Mod types of the various modifications are shown in Table 2 A list of the Mod types can be seen by clicking on the Tools View Modification types menu item that displays the Modification types window shown in Figure 163 This shows the Mod types and the corresponding action and Specification for each modification The window is closed by clicking the Close button User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 146 SAFEPAQ II Modification types Mod type oo Of amp ow Nh Action Extrapolated data points Additional data points between Elow and Ehigh extrapolated usin Renormalise to systematics Renormalises all data between Elow and Ehigh to the systematic Renormalise to experiment Renormalises all data between Elow and Ehigh to the experiment Renormalise by factor Multiplies all data between Elow and Ehigh by a factor fact Removes data points Rem
156. emble decay data File name EAF 2009 1 Timer Header Test library Processes Assemble decay data library Generate property table Write FISPACT index file Assemble 42 data Assemble hazard data Write ASSCFY file Assemble clearance data Figure 20 The Assemble decay data window Clicking the Decay data Documentation menu item will write two files decay library contents and User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 17 hazard library contents in the folder specified in the Decay data folder textbox in the Settings window Figure 1 These contain the decay data in a readable format suitable for use when producing the EAF reports The decay data held in the DecayData table of the Parameter database can be inspected by clicking the Decay data Decay data viewer menu item or the second toolbar button from the right This opens the Decay data viewer window shown in Figure 21 This has a menu bar and a toolbar and when a nuclide is entered in the text box and the Get data button clicked or the first toolbar button clicked or the Enter key pressed data for the nuclide are displayed The nuclide symbol is displayed at the top centre the colour of the background indicates the decay mode a key to these colours is shown in Figure 21 having been made visible by clicking the Key gt gt button it can be removed by clicking the Key button Selecting from the dropdown list boxes alters the units fo
157. entered Click the Delete mod button to show a series of Confirmation dialogs enabling each User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 115 modification to be deleted in turn Click the Change Final button to implement these modifications in Final The same distinction between deleting all the modifications and deleting one discussed above also applies here Now click on the Remainder tab to display the fourth tab shown in Figure 128 D Single reaction processing Li 6 n 2na H 1 m There is 1 modification for this reaction Branching modifications Experimental modifications Systematics modifications Repeated zero modifications Interp mods Greater than 60 MeV modifications Threshold modifications Add mod Greater than 1E 5 eV non threshold Non threshold first point modification Delete mod Suspect interpolation laws 1 Ad hoc modification s Li 6 n 2na H 1 318 Close Figure 127 The Single reaction processing window Tab 3 D Single reaction processing Li 6 n 2na H 1 Source I Pre mods Mods Remainder 100 aroups 175 groups 315 groups 211 groups Quality score O Li 6 n 2na H 1 318 Figure 128 The Single reaction processing window Tab 4 Click the Change summary button to change the summary values discussed below Click the Change multi group button to change the multi group values discussed below as each energy group
158. er Number Integer 2 Energy Number Double 8 Weight fission Number Integer 2 Weight fusion Number Integer 2 bound 351 Name Type Size Group number Number Integer 2 Energy Number Double 8 Boundary Name Type Size subfile Number Integer 2 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 BranchingStatus Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 All branching Yes No 1 Low branching Yes No 1 Mid branching Yes No 1 High branching Yes No 1 Mid factor Number Double 8 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 182 BRData Clearance_IAEA Clearance_IAEA_old DecayData CCFE Fusion Name Isomer spin BR_1 BR_2 BR_3 Name ZA Isom Clearance Name ZA Isom Clearance Name Nuclide number Name Source ZA AWR MAT ELIS STA LISO THALF D_THALF EA D EA EB D EB EG D EG Q1 a pP I I ODDAN AAA A UJ UJ UJ wI UUUUUUUUUUOCOUU AUN PO TSN gt fo A2SOURCE CING CINH HAZSRC Clearance ClearSource OrigSource Type Number Single Number Double Number Double Number Double Type Number Long Number Integer Number Single Type Number Long Number Integer Number Single Type Number Integer Text Text Number Long Number Double Number Integer Number Double Number Integer Number Integer Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number Double Number
159. er m Initials RA Types Versions i Window 1897 urname Forrest C UNIX O 99 ID 254 C 2001 2003 Serial number 000090910254 Commercial s 2005 Date sent 10709 2009 In emal 2007 Address UKAEA Fusion Culham 0x14 3DB Comment Version on XP machine Add Figure 173 The New user window Clicking the Tools Edit user menu item displays the Edit user window shown in Figure 174 A user can be selected User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 153 from the Surname dropdown list which displays their details Certain details such as Initials ID and Serial number cannot be changed Click the Save button to store the information in the database following a confirmation dialog Clicking the Close button closes the window Edit user m E3 Initials Types Versions 5 i Window g7 urname Kopecky v L UNIX 99 ID 2001 2003 Serial number H EM 2005 Date sent 1995 11 08 ema 2007 Address JUKO Research Kalmanstraat 4 1817 HX Alkmaar z The Netherlands Copy details Comment Sent as part of collaboration Save JUKO has contract with us Save Close Figure 174 The Edit user window Clicking the Copy details button copies user information Name Serial number and Password onto the clipboard These details are required when the EASY User Interface software is installed Updating databases A major advantage of developing SAFEPAQ II as a Windows applicat
160. eractive confirmations Figure 117 The Automate processing window The window shows a series of steps the required ones should be checked The first step opens the Compact databases window Figure 4 step 4 refers to the pre modifications discussed above If the various steps are to be carried out un supervised then the Interactive confirmations check box CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQM II 99 should be unchecked This stops any confirmation dialogs that require user interaction It can be seen that eight modification steps are checked in Figure 117 these are described below Note that in all cases the flags Use B and Use R stored with the experimental data determine if the data are used to create the modifications Find all branching modifications Reaction data Find modifications Find all branching modifications considers first the threshold and then the non threshold reactions For each of the threshold reactions the following steps are considered I Are there experimental data for this final state and the other for a multiplicity 2 reaction If so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental data for this final state and the other two for a multiplicity 3 reaction If so then calculate the branching ratio at the given energy and store a Mod type 4 Are there experimental data points for two final states but not the requir
161. erge 97 Generate Final database using preliminary mods 97 Prepare Adjacent cross section table 102 View High energy Factors 96 Find modifications See f Process Ad hoc modifications 105 Find reactions with incorrect ModType17 modifications 106 Generate Final database using modifications 106 Test Final For See g Find all 2nd type of repeated zero modifications 107 Find all missing 60 MeV modifications 107 Single reaction processing Ctrl I 112 Remove repeated energy points From Final 116 Generate data See h Validation plots Ckri V 118 Quality scores Ctrl Q 111 Set nuclides as targets 124 REPORT CtrltR 125 Write EAF Files See i Documentation See j CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 171 Standard 32 Alternate 32 b nn 84 n 2n 84 n 3n 84 n 4n 84 nnp 84 n n d 84 n n t 84 n n h 84 n n a 84 np 84 ma 84 nd 84 nt 84 nh 84 n 2p 84 Others 84 Sources in reaction list 85 Daughters in reaction list 85 Multiplicities in reaction list 85 Multiplicities in reaction and nuclide lists 86 d Find all pre equilib preliminary modifications 87 Find all EH preliminary modifications 87 Find all non threshold Q value preliminary modifications 87 e Find all 20MeV data merge TALYS pre modifications 95 Find all gt 20Me data merge IEAF pre modifications 97 Find all 50MeV data merge TALYS pre modifications 96 User ma
162. et in the second list box and selecting a reaction shows the sources of the data in the third list box The number of data points in the data set is shown for the reaction from the selected source Selecting the Only selected final state radio button means that in cases where there are several isomeric states then only the selected final state in Figure 67 this would be the g state will be plotted If this radio button is selected then it is possible to plot data from all or any of the Sources This is done by clicking on the first source with the mouse and then clicking on the last source with the shift key pressed or by clicking on each required source with the Control key pressed Note that if several sources are selected then the number of points of the first selected is shown Note that when opening this window the target used for plotting when the window was previously closed will be selected This feature introduced from EASY 2005 saves time when plotting data Clicking the Plot button will display the Data visualisation window shown in Figure 68 This shows data for the Co 59 n 2n reaction for all final states the All final states radio button was clicked in Figure 67 Because the total cross section for the g and m states has been calculated see page 58 three curves are present in Figure 68 In addition to the curves experimental data for the reaction stored in the Parameter database are plotted as red triangles The key for the
163. f visualisation modification and processing will be required and it is essential that all permanent changes to data are automatically recorded SAFEPAQ II contains a comprehensive logging system that records the changes that were made The log can be viewed and printed and if necessary additional comments can be added No log entries can be removed only new ones added The automatic logging gives a complete record and is superior to hand written records since nothing is omitted User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 4 SAFEPAQ II Getting started This and the following sections give a hands on guide to using the application Appendix 1 gives some design details When started for the first time the Settings window will open it is essential that the user fills in the correct location of files especially the SAFEPAQ II databases because the application needs to open these immediately and an error will be caused if they are not available Note that 1f this happens i e that as soon as SAFEPAQ II opens it crashes then enter safepaq2 S on the command line to enable it to start in safe mode s so that the settings can be corrected The option p can be used to give debugging information progress prior to a crash in the file C Nsafepaq debug Source database disk SAFEPAG database disk EXFOR disk i Settings User Name R A Forrest EXFOR index width 14055 Base Disk E Version of TALYS TALYS 6a
164. final three text boxes white and enables the Save button Data for a nuclide can be removed by clicking the Delete button Prior to any data changes being made a confirmation dialog is displayed amp Known hazard data m Nuclide H3 v Add Ingestion coefficient 42bE 11 Sv Bq Modify Inhalation coefficient 2 6E 10 Sv Bq Delete Source ICRP 72 Close Figure 16 The Known hazard data window The A data in the 42 IAEA table can be viewed and altered by clicking the Decay data Known A2 data menu item This displays the Known A2 data window shown in Figure 17 Selecting a nuclide from the dropdown list displays its A value and the source of data Data for a new nuclide can be entered by clicking the Add button which causes all three text boxes to be blank with a white background ready for data entry Click the Save button to save the new data or the Cancel button in the same place as the Close button to remove the new data Data values can be changed by selecting the nuclide and clicking the Modify button this makes the background of the final two text boxes white and enables the Save button Data for a nuclide User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 15 can be removed by clicking the Delete button Prior to any data changes being made a confirmation dialog is displayed a EJ a Known A2 data Nuclide H3 M Add A2 value 4 00E 01 TBq Modify Source IAEA 1996 Delete
165. gle Reac check box is ticked in the Settings window Figure 1 An additional feature that saves time when selecting reactions has been added from EASY 2005 The window will open with the target and reaction selected that were used when the window was closed previously Joes D Single reaction processing Li 6 n 2na H 1 Targets Source Pre mods Mods Reactions Remainder Source H 1 H 2 H 3 He 3 He 4 n 2na n n d n g n p nt EFF 2 4 Sources J EFF 3 1 x Li 6 Li C Mr 200 Be Be 3 B 10 B 11 C12 M Close Li 6 n 2na H 1 318 Figure 124 The Single reaction processing window Tab 1 Note that if a reaction is split into several final states then these must be considered consecutively g then m then n without shutting down SAFEPAQ II so that the systematics data in the various Summary tables in Parameter can be correctly stored Note that the selected reaction and the reaction number are also displayed at the bottom left of the window This is necessary as in some cases the entire reaction including the daughter cannot be displayed in the window caption User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 113 Note that only sources relevant to the specified type of incoming particle are displayed Click the Get sources button to enter all the sources for the selected reaction into the dropdown list box Note that sou
166. gle Resonance Approximation SRA which CCFE Fusion 58 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion is described in Appendix 5 To generate the data scrap for a capture reaction click on the Visualisation Create n g scrap using SRA menu item which displays the Create n g scrap using SRA window shown in Figure 77 Enter the target in the first text box then click on one of the other text boxes As much information as possible is then filled in the boxes automatically from the Parameter database typically it will only be necessary to enter a Resonance energy if an experimental thermal cross section and Resonance integral exist Choose the final state and then click the Calculate button This writes the data scrap with the given file name and calculates the SRA Resonance integral If the Upper energy Ep value is less than the normal upper limit for a RI calculation 100 keV then a red warning symbol is shown to the right of the ratio A ToolTip explains this symbol further Various values of the resonance energy can be tried in order to achieve a calculated RI close to the experimental value The data scrape can also be viewed and edited from within the Scrap editor window Figure 76 as described above To generate a data scrap for a fission reaction click on the Visualisation Create n f scrap using SRA menu item which displays the Create n f scrap using SRA window similar to that shown in Figure 77 The only difference is that it is no
167. greater than 60 MeV modifications Reaction data Find modifications Find all greater than 60 MeV modifications finds reactions where there are data points with energies greater than 60 MeV These unnecessary points are removed using a Mod type 5 modification In non extended libraries the menu item shows 20 MeV Find all threshold modifications using Wapstra Reaction data Find modifications Find all threshold modifications using Wapstra compares the threshold in the file with that calculated using the Wapstra mass table If Abs Qwapstra Qfite gt 10000 eV then a modification is stored as Mod type 7 Find all 1 E 5 eV non threshold modifications Reaction data Find modifications Find all 1E 5 eV non threshold modifications finds the reactions which are non threshold and where the first point is in the range 1 x 10 E eV For these reactions add a new point at 1 x 10 eV storing the modification as Mod type 8 Find all non threshold first point modifications Reaction data Find modifications Find all non threshold first point modifications finds the reactions which are non threshold and where the first energy value is either lt 1 x 10 in practice this means E 0 or gt 1000 eV or E 1 x 10 eV but cross section 0 For these reactions the first point is changed to Energy 1 x 10 eV and cross section 1 x 107 b the interpolation law between points 1 and 2 is changed to 1 if necessary These two
168. gure 144 Select the source of data either Final a Data source or Experimental data in the first dropdown list and then select a reaction type from the second For reactions such as n 2n which have a threshold then the Min energy textbox can be left as 0 but for say n p reactions a value of 1 00E 06 eV would be appropriate this ensures that only data above the Min energy value are considered when finding the maximum cross section Information on the Quality Scores are also extracted from the databases since for split reactions the scores can be different it is necessary to specify how the score of the total cross section is calculated There are two options if one of the final states has a Score 0 then the total has Score 0 and if one of the final states is gt 0 then the total has a score which is the maximum of all the final states One of these options is selected in the Split Score group Min s 0 0 selects the first option and Max s 0 s selects the second If information on the width of the excitation curve are required additional time is required to find these data then check the Include width data option which enables the Width at maximum radio button The width refers to the width of the excitation curve at half the maximum cross section value User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 130 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion Cross section analysis rT71 x axis Source Fin
169. h as n xp defined in Table 1 At energies above 20 MeV many other summed reactions are important In order to produce these all the reactions for a particular reaction and source should be copied to the Cache See the option on the Data selection window Figure 82 to copy all reactions to the Cache Because many reactions are split and summed reactions are totals it is necessary to add all the split reactions together Clicking the Add isomers for all reactions for target menu item does this for the selected target Clicking the Edit Add cross sections to create all MT gt 200 sums menu item will produce as many summed cross sections as possible The various possibilities and the definition of the summed reactions are shown in Table 1 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 63 Table 1 Details of the summed reactions with MT gt 200 MT Reaction Summed reactions 201 njan p d n n p n d 202 n xn n 2n n 3n n 4n n 5n n 6n n 7n n 8n 203 nxp n p njn p n 2np n 3np n pa 204 n xd n d n n d n 2nd n 3nd n da 205 n xt n t n n t n 2nt n 3nt n to 206 n xh n h n n h n 2nh n 3nh n ph 207 n xa m a n n a n 2no n 3na n pa 208 n t n t n n d n 2np 209 n n t n n t n 2nd n 3np 210 n 2nt n 2nt n 3nd n 4np 211
170. h 2010 CCFE Fusion SAFEPAQ II It is possible that the information on the progress shown by the ticks can become incorrect due to crashes or other problems In this case if it is known that a step has been completed but no tick is shown then double click on the text and the corresponding tick will be toggled on As various operations are carried out entries are made in the Log This can be viewed by clicking on the Log View Log menu item or the last toolbar button to display the Log window shown in Figure 6 The date and time of the entry and the action are displayed More entries can be seen by scrolling down By default all entries are shown but various classes can be displayed by clicking on the View menu and selecting a class The available ones are Added comments Processing entries Ad hoc entries Warnings and Errors It is possible to add a comment to an existing entry or add a new entry which just contains a comment by selecting items on the Edit menu Note that shortcut keys are defined for several items thus ctr1 E will enable a comment to be entered The complete Log or a selected part of it can be printed out to the default printer or copied to the clipboard by clicking on the File Print all File Print selected or Edit Copy menu items respectively Note that for QA reasons it 1s not possible to delete Log entries As the Log becomes larger it is helpful to be able to search for specific entries Clicking Edit Find
171. hat the average curve of the points 4 passes through X Note that Er can be any value 4 Current data points in range Ej lt l E lt Enigh and the next point gt Eyig are multiplied by a factor f 2 Current data points in range Ej lt E lt Enigh are removed from the data set Note that there must be t no points gt Ej in the set and if bs the point at Eupper 20 or 60 high MeV is removed by this 4 operation then it is added back to the dataset e datase Elow 6 Current data points in range Ej lt E lt Eef are multiplied by a linearly energy dependent factor f ffo fi fo E Ej s Exzcr Es fo Xref f fact If f 0 then f is set to 0 001 Data points in range User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 92 SAFEPAQ II Mod type Description Diagrams Ever lt E Epign are multiplied by the factor fj aor es Replaces QI in the Reaction entry by the new Q value Eref Note that no data points are changed Removes npt Addnum points from the start of cross section replaces by point Xref at E Eref Note that these points must be at the start of the data set Additional cross section data between Elow and Ehigh given in Addnum are added If the data overlaps the current data set then the existing energies are used At higher energies a spacing of 0 5 MeV is used 10 The interpolation law for point
172. he main window note that it has menus a toolbar the set of buttons each with a picture and a status bar The name of the current EAF project is shown in the title bar Sif SAFEPAQ II EAF 2009 1 m File Visualisation EXFOR Experimentaldata Integraldata Libraries Reaction data Decay data Tools Log Help TOG OL l0 8 du Mass Sod NR ER S DD MA S 0 00 00 Figure 2 The main SAFEPAQ II window The purpose of each toolbar button can be seen by resting the cursor over the button this will display a ToolTip Clicking on the File menu displays the File menu items the first of these is New EAF project this will be referred to in the text as FilelNew EAF project Clicking this displays the New EAF project window shown in Figure 3 New EAF project Name EAF 2010 Description New library based on EAF 2007 Path I Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq_2009_ m Figure 3 The New EAF project window Enter the name and description of the new library in the first two text boxes and then click the browse button to the right of the Path text box This displays the Browse For Folder dialog that enables the location of the new databases to be specified Note that a new folder can be specified in the dialog by clicking the Make New Folder button Clicking the Create button will cause the original databases to be copied to the new location all the library specific data to be removed and the
173. he standard EXFOR data n EXFOR image m amp l N 14 n 2n 2 10E 2 n DEB65 m A JAE70 175E2 m 2 9 NPL73 v TRM72 140E 2 oO B LOU73 E d O DEB67 el H m TUR67 Oo g E 1 05E 2 2 i B ARK76 2 jJ m NPL78 O O 70E34 E NAGO1 E TOH04 a E NAGOO a 3 50E 3 i m NAG89 E HAM 5 B 0 00E 0 4 H 4 H i E KUR61 0 00E 0 1 40E 7 2 80E 7 4 20E 7 5 60E 7 fo 1 ias Energy eV CCFE Fusion Figure 61 The EXFOR image window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 45 Add Private data Target A27 Ag 108m format Reaction n2 fx Lab code RI38 amp amp ANNa format Date 1988 yy format Reference F199 v Filatenkov 4 4 and S V Cuvaev RI 252 report 1999 Title Cross section measurement at neutron energies around 14 MeV Authors A Filatenkov S V Chuvaev Final state Og Om On Total Filename AL 27N 2N x4ds A Add AL 27N 2Ng 4s AL 27N P x4s AL 27N XA x4s M Figure 62 The Add Private data window Delete Private EXFOR data Reaction Code Points Full access H 2 n 2n BRCO2 16 990003450 Be 9 n 3n LVN98 990003730 C 12 n 2n TOH96 990003740 C 13 n 2n BRCO2 990003460 N 14 n 2n NAGOO 990001100 N 14 n zn TOHO4 990005210 N 14 n zn TOHO4 990005230 Ne 545 entries Standard Figure 63 The Delete Private EXFOR
174. higher if present by 1 fact 15 Change cross section The data point at Eref has its cross section value changed to Xref 16 Add single data point A new data point of cross section value Xref at Eref is added 17 Delete modification An existing modification of type Addnum with parameters given by Elow Ehigh Eref Xref fact is not used 18 Low energy merge Additional data below Eref given in Addnum The interpolation law is Int fact and the number of point is in Xref 19 Energy scale shift All data points have energy value increased by Eref CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQM II 91 Table 3 Details of the modification types Mod Description Diagrams type 1 Current data for the reaction has E 9 points the last point at Eupper Ei and Eu Enpigh are such that Eupper lt Etow lt x e Enign Using the final two data k E points to extrapolate cross section Etow mign values for the 11 points at Ej and Enpigh and 9 others in between are calculated 2 Current data points in range Ej lt X E lt Ehign and the next point gt Enign ref i are multiplied by a factor so that the average curve of the points 1 passes through X Note that Er l is one of the energies where i Enigh systematics are defined l t Eref En 3 Current data points in range Ej lt X E lt Ejigh and the next point gt Epion iet are multiplied by a factor so t
175. his action The data files contain double points These are where two data points have the same energy but different cross sections Double points and single points exactly at the Ey value for n y reactions can cause problems It is necessary to slightly shift the energy value of such points clicking the Reaction data Find all EH preliminary modifications menu item carries out this step Thirdly it is possible that some data files contain inaccurate Q values for the non threshold reactions These can be corrected by using data from the Wapstra mass table Any reactions where the Q value in Master differs by more than 5 from the Wapstra value are changed to the Wapstra value Click on the Reaction data Find all non threshold Q value preliminary modifications menu item to carry out this action These three types of preliminary modifications involve several of the basic modifications considered in SAFEPAQ II The nineteen modification types are shown in Table 2 The results of these steps can be viewed by clicking the Reaction data View preliminary modifications menu item or the twenty fourth toolbar button which displays the Preliminary modifications window shown in Figure 111 Modifications are either introduced automatically during processing or in an Ad hoc fashion For those added by processing there is a yellow background text box containing Process For Ad hoc mods the box contains Ad hoc on a blue ba
176. hly join the TALYS data to the existing data at 20 MeV may be significantly different from 1 Such reactions may be better represented by changing the data source to TALYS over the entire energy range To view the values of the factors click the Reaction data View High energy factors menu item that displays the View High energy factors window shown in Figure 115 Enter the factor required in the text box and click the Get reactions button to list the reactions the data source and factor f By default the All sources check box is ticked This means that even if the existing data comes from TALYS then the reaction is listed this can occur if the TALYS data lt 20 MeV were modified To remove reactions with a TALYS data source from the data grid clear the check box In order to view the data for a particular reaction click the Visualisation button which is enabled once a reaction is selected this copies the selected reaction s data to the Cache if these are not already present and displays the Targets and sources window Figure 67 with the appropriate target and reaction selected It is then possible to plot the data in the normal manner If a reaction already has a data merge pre modification prior to the automatic data merge with TALYS then the calculated factor is almost certainly incorrect For such reactions the calculated factor is replaced with the value 1 0E6 Any reactions with this factors in the table should be investig
177. hown in the list box The current multiplicity of the reaction number of final states is shown in the Multiplicity text box and the current reaction final state is indicated by the radio buttons A new source and or multiplicity final state can be selected from the list box entered in the text box and by clicked the correct radio button Clicking the Modify button will save the data in the Parameter database Note that if the multiplicity of a reaction is modified using this window after the Master and Final databases have been generated then it is necessary to also modify it in them Depending on the stage of processing that has been reached then the Modify Multiplicity in Master and or Modify Multiplicity in Final options should be checked prior to clicking the Modify button Clicking the Add button in Figure 100 displays the Add reaction window shown in Figure 102 The target of the new reaction is entered in the first text box by default the target in the Reaction list window Figure 100 is entered the reaction is selected from the dropdown list the data source is selected from the list box and the multiplicity and final state are entered in the text box and selected with the radio buttons Clicking the Add button will save the data in the Parameter database Note that if the reaction list is being added to after the Master and Final databases have been generated then it is necessary to add data for the new reaction to them Depen
178. ial per file Note that from EAF 2007 projects with an incoming particle other than a neutron can be used The incoming particle IP text box allows the type of library neutron proton or deuteron to be specified If changes have been made then these can be saved by clicking the Save button or discarded by clicking the Discard button If a new library has been specified in the Library options window then data can be read by clicking on Libraries Read new library or the eighteenth toolbar button to display the Read new library window shown in Figure 25 Select the required Source ID and click Read to read and convert the data Note that 1f the database already exists then you are given the option to delete it copy the generic database rename it and User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 21 then read in the data Note that the data file s are assumed to be in the same folder as the corresponding database S Read new tibrary Available Source IDs ACTL ADL 3 Cm ADL 3 l BRC BROND 22 CENDL 2 1 cr E Figure 25 The Read new library window A summary of all the available source libraries can be seen by displaying the Library summary window shown in Figure 26 Available libraries Database name Database path Strict ENDF O ADL 3 C JENDL C EAF C IEAF xv Version 6 C Derived data MF2 Quantity gt Total targets n n n 2n n 3n n f
179. ibrary In some User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 16 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion poorly known nuclides the spin is unknown such a lack of data could cause problems These nuclides can be identified by clicking on the Decay data Find nuclides with unknown spin menu item This displays the Nuclides isomers with unknown spin window shown in Figure 19 It is recommended that these nuclides be investigated and the spin data improved Nuclides isomers with unknown spin 1 nuclides La 128 g m Get nuclides Close Figure 19 The Nuclides isomers with unknown spin window Once all nuclides and the data sources are specified then the data can be assembled by clicking on the Decay data Assemble decay data menu item This displays the Assemble decay data window shown in Figure 20 The file name that was entered in the New EAF project window Figure 3 is automatically entered in the File name text box it is recommended that this should not be changed This name is used to construct the names of the various decay data files Tick the various check boxes in the Processes group and click the Assemble button to begin the assembly process This is quick 1 minute and all the decay data files required by FISPACT are generated The second option generates the DecayData table in Parameter that contains all the decay data this is required for subsequent cross section processing Ass
180. ication is chosen from the dropdown list then list boxes showing the source databases and the reaction types become visible For both modification types it is necessary to select a database from the Source databases dropdown box which will provide the data for the reaction In the Low energy merge it is possible to use data for a different type of reaction than the reaction specified in the Reaction dropdown box To do this select a reaction for the low energy data from the Source dropdown box Clicking the Add button will add the modification to the Parameter database Note that from EASY 2005 it is possible to do a data merge using data from a summed reaction rather than only for a reaction of the exact reaction type User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 90 SAFEPAQ II Table 2 Specification of the modification types Mod Action Specification type 1 Extrapolated data points Additional data points between Elow and Ehigh extrapolated using the law in Xref 2 Renormalise to systematics Renormalise all data between Elow and Ehigh to the systematic value Xref given at 14 5 MeV or 30 keV Eref 3 Renormalise to experiment Renormalise all data between Elow and Ehigh to the experimental value Xref given at Eref 4 Renormalise by factor Multiplies all data between Elow and Ehigh by a factor fact 5 Removes data points Remove
181. igh E ref X ref factor Addnum Comment 9 All Range from to C Ignore Status CCFE Fusion Figure 113 The Process Ad Hoc Preliminary modifications window Rather than process all the Ad hoc preliminary modifications it is possible to select a range If the PreModification and PreModSummary tables in the Parameter database are examined using Access the required Mod numbers can be User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 95 chosen The Range from radio button is clicked and the starting and finish modifications inclusive are entered in the text boxes In some cases the Status of the reaction is unimportant if experimental data or the data source have been changed in Parameter then the Status field is changed from 0 to 1 and the pre modification is not added To ignore the reaction Status check the Ignore Status check box It is possible that following the addition of Ad hoc pre modifications that for some reactions there may exist redundant Mod type 17 pre modifications These should be removed and this can be done by clicking the Reaction data Find reactions with incorrect ModType 17 pre modifications menu item that displays the Reactions with incorrect ModType 17 pre modifications window shown in Figure 114 Clicking the Get reactions button lists the reactions If any reactions are shown then select one and click the View data button to open the Reaction data window Figure 70 where the
182. igh target mass it is appropriate to be able to consider the sum of n 2n and n f so that the scatter can be reduced Clicking the Plot button will cause the data to be collected from the database a message in the Main window status bar reminds the user that this process can be time consumming Having collected the data then the Analysis graph window shown in Figure 145 is opened and the data displayed Note that the number of data points are displayed in the Main window status bar The menu bar in the Analysis graph window allows the User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 131 graph to be customised as required Clicking the Options Axis scale menu item displays the Axis scale window Figure 89 where the axis ranges on the x and y axes can be changed Clicking the Options Distinguish Even Odd or Options Distinguish Even Odd Z menu items will show the various Even and Odd combinations of Z and N for the targets in various colours and affords another method of spotting trends Clicking the Options Distinguish Importance menu item will indicate if the reaction is included in the list of important reactions given in reference 15 analysis carried out with EASY 2003 or the more recent as yet unpublished EASY 2007 by the use of two colours Note that there are menu items Options Importance from EASY 2003 and Options Importance from EASY 2007 to select one of these two options Clicking the Options Importance from EASY 2
183. ile name jef22 Source filelD JEF 2 2 Figure 29 The Extract data from MDF window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 24 SAFEPAQ II Experimental data The data available at thermal energy can be displayed by clicking on Experimental data View 0 0253 eV data or the tenth toolbar button to display the 0 0253 eV experimental data window shown in Figure 30 Selecting a target shows which reactions have data and selecting a reaction displays the available data in the grid Note that depending on the incoming particle type selected the Settings window Figure 1 the reactions here and in subsequent windows will be e g n 2n d 2n or p 2n In addition to the energy cross section and uncertainty displayed in the first three columns the last three columns show three flags These indicate whether the data are used for calculating branching modifications Use B for calculating renormalisation modifications Use R and in validation Use V The source of the data is indicated by a reference where this is known Clicking the Modify button will display the selected data in editing boxes below the reference Changes to the data values or the flags can then be made and saved to the database by clicking the Save button A new data point can be added by clicking the Add button This displays the dialog shown in Figure 31 asking if the new data point is for the selected target and reaction If the Yes butto
184. ill be displayed on screen with the lines thick making them more visible This is useful if graphs are copied to the clipboard for use in other applications Checking the Options Print lines thick menu item means that graphs will be printed with the lines thick making them more visible Clicking the Options Redraw menu item replots the graph Checking the Options 2 dec pl on x axis and Options 2 dec pl on y axis menu items means that graphs will be displayed with the values on the axes having 2 decimal places rather than the default of 1 This is necessary if the range of the values is chosen to be small Clicking the Options Reaction data window for menu item displays a submenu that shows the names of the various curves that are plotted either final states or data sources Clicking one of these will display the Reaction data window for the selected reaction shown in Figure 70 The Reaction data window for the first reaction can also be opened by clicking the sixteenth toolbar button Checking the Options Reaction data warning menu item checked by default means that if data for a sum are to be displayed in the Reaction data window then a warning dialog with the message Unknown reaction possibly a sum is displayed prior to the window appearing If this warning is not required then it can be removed by clearing the check on this menu item If EXFOR data are shown then clicking on a data point will give information about th
185. indow E Quality scores View reactions Validated 5 Conflicting diff and int 5 Strong agreement 4 Strong disagreement 3 Weak agreement 2 Weak disagreement 1 Experimental data 1 6 No experimental data 0 O All m Reaction Score 231 B 10 n t Be 8 6 Source in N 14 n 2n N 13 Print Copy 0 16 n p N 16 F 19 n 2n F 18 F 19 n p 0 19 Na 23 n 2n Na 22 Na 23 n p Ne z3 Maq 25 n p Na z5 Mq z6in a Ne 23 1 27i n p Mq 27 Al 27 n tjMg 25 Reaction score amp C1 37 n a P 34 Si 28 n p l Zz8 Si 29 n p l Zz9 Si 30 n p l 30 Si 30 n a Mq 27 P 3lin p 5i 31 P 3lin ajAl 28 32 n p P 32 34in p P 34 34i n a 5i 31 C1 37 n p 3 37 Get reactions Copy Save Cy Cy CV CV CV CV C A CV CV CV CV C Cy C CV CV CV C CS Ch v Close Figure 123 The Quality scores window In the case that reactions with score 5 are selected then it is possible to select which type of Discrepant reactions are shown in the Discrepant reactions group Selecting a reaction displays the score in one or two text boxes enabling it to be changed Clicking the Save button saves the change Note that if all reactions or those with score 0 are displayed then for high mass targets the new score is not displayed in the list This technical problem can be avoided by changing scores with one of the other reaction radio buttons clicked The list of reactions can
186. indow Figure 1 The status of progress towards creating a new EAF library can be monitored by displaying the Status window This is done by clicking on File Status or the fourth toolbar button to display the Status window shown in Figure 5 Note that the name of the current EAF project is given in the title bar The Status window shows the various steps that have been completed by a red tick On a new project there will be no ticks displayed tatus EAF 2009 1 Decay data assembled Master database generated Pre modifications found Final database generated from pre modifications Adjacent cross section table prepared Branching modifications found Experimental modifications found Systematics modifications found Repeated zero modifications found Greater than 60 MeV modifications found Threshold modifications found Greater than 1 E 5 eV non threshold modifications found Non threshold first point modifications found Suspect interpolation laws found Final database generated using modifications SSS SO NS SS OSS ON Summary values calculated 69 group values calculated 100 group values calculated 172 group values calculated 175 group values calculated 315 group values calculated 211 group values calculated 351 group values calculated Uncertainty values calculated EAF GXS file written EAF x5 file written EAF UN file written SSosvs Figure 5 The Status window User manual Issue 8 Marc
187. ing on the Reaction data Find all 2nd type of repeated zero modifications menu item This finds reactions where the first two points have cross section 0 and replaces the second value with a value linearly interpolated from the first and third points Usually this class of modifications will not be required The seventh test shows if any reactions have the data point at 60 MeV missing To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Missing 60 MeV data point submenu item this displays the Missing 60 MeV data point window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption Note that if reactions are shown in the list box then it may be possible to generate a set of modifications to correct them by clicking on the Reaction data Find all missing 60 MeV modifications menu item This finds reactions where there is no data point at 60 MeV and adds it using a value linearly extrapolated from the last two data points Usually this class of modifications will not User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 108 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion be required For non extended libraries 20 replaces 60 on all menu items The eighth test shows if any reactions contain repeated energy points To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Repeated energy points submenu item this displays the Reactions with repeated energy points window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption Note that if reactions are shown in the
188. ion is that it enables several users to participate in producing EAF libraries These users are in separate countries and so there is the question of how their contributions can be integrated to form the final library It is possible to design the Access databases so that there is a single Design Master and several Replica databases When changes are made to the Replicas these can be reconciled in the Design Master by a process of synchronization which ensures that all copies are identical Such a process is automatic and there is no possibility of choosing if all changes should be implemented Also there are certain technical differences in the structure of the databases in a Replica set the most important being that auto number fields are added randomly rather than in numerical order It therefore seemed better to carry out the updating in a more manual fashion All information on a particular library version is held in the Parameter database In addition choices about experimental User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 154 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion data to be used for visualisation are held in the EXFOR database It is only necessary therefore to have copies of these two databases which are relatively small compared to Final to compare with the original which is held at Culham A series of queries using tables from the original termed the Internal and the copy termed the External databases have been
189. ion on page 88 Now click on the Mods tab to display the third tab shown in Figure 127 D Single reaction processing Li 6 n 2na H 1 J Source Pre mods Mods Remainder There are no pre modifications for this reaction Pre equilibrium preliminary modifications EH preliminary modifications Non threshold Q value preliminary mods Add pre mod Change Final Li 6 n 2na H 1 318 Close Figure 126 The Single reaction processing window Tab 2 Text in the window shows the number of modifications that exist for the reaction If this is greater than 0 then the Delete button is enabled and the existing modifications should be removed Note that if required the existing modifications can be used to recalculate Final If any of the modifications is Ad hoc then this is noted at the bottom of the tab as in Figure 127 Now click the Find mods button to find any modifications required for the reaction As the various modification types are considered a tick or a cross is displayed next to the modification description to indicate if modifications have been found Click the Interp mods button to open the Interpolation law modifications window Figure 118 to decide if the interpolation law needs to be changed Additional modifications can be entered by clicking the Add mod button This displays the Add Modification window shown in Figure 121 Note that the Target Reaction and Final state details are already
190. is completed a tick is shown against the group name Click the Change uncertainty button to change the uncertainty values discussed below Click the Change averages button to change the average cross section values in User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 116 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion the various neutron spectra values see page 69 The Quality score for the reaction see page 111 is displayed this can be changed and then saved by clicking the Save Score button When changes are made it is a good idea to add comments in the Log This can be done by clicking the View Log button to open the Log window Figure 6 The final processing action for the data in the Final database is to remove any repeated energy points Reactions where they occur are indicated by the eighth test described on page 108 If there are repeated points then click on the Reaction data Remove repeated energy points from Final menu item This step takes typically from a few minutes to 1 5 hours depending on the number of reactions and replaces a set of points with the same energy by a set separated by a single digit in the sixth decimal place It can now be assumed that the data in Final are good enough The data can now be further processed Clicking the Reaction data Generate data Generate summary of Final database submenu item will start the calculation of the thermal 30 keV 14 5 MeV 20 MeV and resonance integral values for each reaction and p
191. is the radiative width I is the total width E is the energy of the resonance and E is the energy It is assumed that c is measured in m and E in J Note that the second fraction is dimensionless and so it can be assumed that all the terms are measured in eV The relationship between E and k is shown in equation 2 ne E gy Uere 2 The energy dependence of T is shown in equation 3 Wood eee 3 where T is the reduced neutron width units of eV are used Using the numerical values of all the constants the basic formula can be rewritten so that o is measured in b and E in eV The numerical values are h 1 05457266 107 Js m 1 008664904 u 1 u 1 6605402 10 kg 1 J 6 2415064 10 5 eV 1b 110 m Thus using f as the dimensionless fraction the basic formula with units in brackets is given by equation 4 mg h Js co m 2m kg E J User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 215 Using the numerical values equation 4 can be written as equation 5 NEC o b E eV prp RE 5 where C 6 50977546 10 Assuming that all energies that follow are measured in eV and all cross sections in b and that the non elastic contribution to the total width can be neglected then equation 1 can be written as equation 6 0 pr C2 Lb VE E E 10 T In order to determine T the thermal cross section value is used and assuming that Eo gt gt E and Eo gt gt I a
192. issing in Final This means that it is not possible just to add the reaction using Figure 102 and the reaction is not present when using Single reaction processing Figure 124 To correct this situation click on the Tools Repair Final menu item to display the Repair Final window shown in Figure 165 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 147 Repair Final The reactions listed are missing from Final Number of points Number of ranges Figure 165 The Repair Final window Clicking the Get reactions button displays any reactions missing from Final but present in Parameter in the list box Clicking on a reaction displays a message describing which tables the reaction is missing from and where possible showing the number of data points and interpolation ranges in the text boxes Clicking the Repair button will add the reaction details back into the Final database tables using data from Master There is now an entry for the reaction but the actual data may not be correct a warning dialog box informs the user that the data should be corrected using the Single reaction processing window Figure 124 The window is closed by clicking the Close button If SAFEPAQ II crashes it is possible that one of the Access databases can be damaged If this happens then during use of SAFEPAQ II an error message will be displayed stating that the file is not in database format when the application tries to open
193. ission C GAM I 100 Fusion C XMAS 172 Flat and fisson Vitamin J 175 Flat and fusion C TRIPOLI 315 Flat fission and fusion C Vitamin 211 Flat C TRIPOLI 351 Flat Figure 130 Multi group files window SAFEPAQ II 9 Groupi175F contains 66258 reactions vs Delete all reactions from table No will keep reactions and restart calculation Cancel will stop any calculations Typical elapsed time is 16 h Figure 131 Confirmation dialog prior to starting multi group calculation Figure 131 shows the number of reactions that have already been calculated Clicking the No button will keep the results and restart the calculation Clicking Yes will remove existing results and start again Note that where there is more than one weighting give the same answer for each confirmation dialog A mathematical description of the methods of multi group calculation is given in Appendix 3 Clicking the Reaction data Generate data Generate uncertainty data submenu item will start the calculation of the uncertainty data for all the reactions If uncertainty data already exist then a confirmation dialog similar to Figure 129 is displayed This step takes about 55 minutes The summary information generated above can be used to carry out validation of the Final data against the experimental and systematic data held in Parameter Clicking the Reaction data Validation plots menu
194. ist EXFOR entries window Clicking the Copy button copies all the entries to the clipboard The list can be printed to the default printer by clicking the Print button Clicking on the third item on the EXFOR menu Assemble book or the ninth toolbar button displays the Assemble book window shown in Figure 66 DE Assemble book gr Initial target B 11 Reaction nig Finaltarget Al 27 Book name Capture 1 doc Graph type O Include library data Close Figure 66 The Assemble book window CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 47 This window allows a series of images to be plotted in a Word document a book and then printed out for further study Choose the range of graphs by selecting the intial and final targets and the reaction type in the dropdown list boxes Give a name for the book doc is always present in the text box and then click on the Assemble button This will produce the Word file containing all the images for the specified targets and reaction with two plots per page As described above the EXFOR images are used It is also possible to produce a book of images that contain EXFOR data and points from one of the standard data libraries These images are described later page 49 but if they are available then a book can be assembled using them if the Include library data option is checked and the required Source ID is selected in the dropdown list box
195. isting Yes is automatically changed to No SAFEPAQ II e P Do you want to add data for the selected target and reaction Figure 31 A dialog to choose the type of Add process Add 0 0253 eV experimental data Target He 4 Ag 108m format Reaction ng m UseB Energy 00253 ev UseR C X sec 6 0E 6 b UseV Delta X sec 1 0E 6 b st Reference H02 x Hoang H M et al Z Phys A 342 1992 283 Add Final state Og Om On Tota Figure 32 The Add 0 0253 eV experimental data window The data available at 30 keV can be displayed by clicking on Experimental data View 30 keV data or the eleventh toolbar button to display the 30 keV experimental data window shown in Figure 33 Selecting a target shows which reactions have data and selecting a reaction displays the available data in the grid In addition to the energy cross section and uncertainty displayed in the first three columns the last three columns show three flags These indicate whether the data are used for calculating branching modifications Use B for calculating renormalisation modifications Use R and in validation Use V The source of the data is indicated by a reference where this is known Clicking the Modify button will display the selected data in editing boxes below the reference shown in Figure 33 Changes to the data values or the flags can then be made and saved to the database
196. item or the twenty eighth toolbar button displays the Validation plots window shown in User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion SAFEPAQ II Figure 132 Since EASY 2005 three distinct types of graphs can be plotted First consider the histogram plots selected by clicking the Histogram radio button Select a reaction type in the dropdown list box a comparison type C S shows the Final Systematics ratio C E shows the Final Experimental ratio and C T shows the Final Trend ratio The C T option is disabled when the Validation plots window is opened from the menu or Toolbar The use of this option is described in the Analysis section From EASY 2007 the cross section analysis feature discussed later enables trend lines to be stored and these can also be used for validation Check one or more of the Final state options more than one final state results in multiple graphs and the required energy An additional feature from EASY 2005 is the ability to produce C S plots at 20 MeV for some reactions Note that if the Include summed data with Total check box is ticked then comparison is made with experimental data for the total cross section and the sum of all final states for split reactions These summed reactions are not actually present in the Final database Clicking the Plot button displays the Validation plot window shown in Figure 133 LL Validation plots Reaction n 2n v Graph Final state Histogram Cig
197. justment of data processed conversion to a common format compiled into a library validated against experimental data and systematics and documented Similarly the decay data files need to be compiled and documented and all the subsidiary files required as input to the inventory code FISPACT 1 need to be generated in a consistent manner The SYMPAL processing system which originated at ECN Petten has been used previously to carry out the task of cross section library processing Details of the usage of SYMPAL are covered in the User Manual 2 and the guide to the Utilities 3 However the tasks of evaluation and visualisation of the cross section libraries and the maintenance of the decay data library were not covered by SYMPAL Usage of SYMPAL was complicated and because it was not written at Culham maintenance improvement and quality assurance proved difficult A first step to try and improve this was the development of the SAFEPAQ application SAFEPAQ System for Activation File Evaluation Processing And Quality assurance was developed and used for parts of the processing of EAF 97 and EAF 99 4 5 6 The user manual 7 describes the version developed in 1997 SAFEPAQ and SYMPAL were UNIX applications and the visualisation used PV WAVE 8 Since then many changes have occurred in the computer facilities at Culham and it was judged necessary to reconsider the whole philosophy of nuclear data work The main decision was to
198. ker ccfe ac uk Internet www fusion org uk easy20107 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion
199. khazov I D et al 3 Meeting on Neutron Radiation Metrlogy Moscoww 1983 201 gt Add a new reference by moving to the last record and typing the new data References Close can be edited Note do not alter the Source string Figure 42 The References window Under the Experimental data menu there is an item to view those nuclides for which systematics data are used during renormalisation If the flags are set then systematics take precedence over any experimental data The systematics flags can be seen by clicking the Experimental data View systematics flags menu item this opens the Systematics flags window shown in Figure 43 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 32 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion amp Systematics flags Targets Reactions Add C 13 ral Use B No C 14 i N 15 ine Use A Yes Modify Ne 20 Ne 21 Delete Ne 22 Na 24 Mg 24 Mg 28 Al26 M Close Figure 43 The Systematics flags window Clicking the Modify button displays check boxes for the two flags clicking the Save button will store the new values in the database Clicking the Delete button removes the selected reaction from the database Clicking the Add button displays the Add systematics flags window shown in Figure 44 Use the text box and dropdown list to select the reaction use the radio buttons to select the final state and set the flags befor
200. lso include information on the multiplicity of the source in addition to the actual multiplicity in the Reaction table The tables in the master mdb database are defined in Section 6 The cache mdb database tables are very similar to those in master mdb but also include information on the history of modifications made to the original data The tables in the cache mdb database are defined in Section 7 The final mdb database tables contain additional information on group data and the suspect interpolation laws The tables in the final mdb database are defined in Section 8 Note that from EASY 2005 the final add mdb database contains all the Group nnn tables except Group 175F Final then contains links to these tables The test mdb database tables are identical to final mdb except that the Adjacent cross section and suspect points tables are not present and AverageXS is added The EXFOR mdb database is not shown in the diagram above It contains information selected from the EXFOR CD ROMs see page 34 that are used for visualisation The tables in the EXFOR mdb database are defined in Section 9 In addition to the tables present in each of the databases discussed above extensive use is made of pre compiled queries Whenever data is selected from a database table data in a record are amended or a new record is added this is achieved by calling a query from Visual Basic In most cases various parameters are needed so that a particular q
201. lysis developed during the production of EAF 2010 is the ability to produce cross section curves for threshold reactions based on the fits in the Analysis tool To do this click on the Tools Generate cross section data menu item this opens the Generate cross section data window shown in Figure 151 Fill in details of the reaction type from the User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 138 SAFEPAQ II dropdown list and the reaction target in the text box Clicking the Calculate button will fill in all the fitted parameters from the Analysis tool if these have already been stored In cases where these are not available then the warning dialog shown in Figure 152 1s displayed the missing data labels are shown in red and the graph is not plotted So long as all the fitted data are available then a graph is shown using the selected Fitting options By default 1 is selected click one of the other radio buttons and clicking the Calculate button will display a different cross section curve The Parametric data points are shown by red squares in the graph and refer to En Energy of the threshold Em Energy at which the cross section maximum 0 occurs E_ and E Energies defined from the Skewness parameter k and the width at half maximum A Ay E E k E E Em E E Ez 20 MeV E39 30 MeV Eo 60 MeV Note that in Figure 151 these are shown as Eth Em max E E E20 E30 E60 respectively P
202. m xy plot x axis Mass 4 n Total sy plot x axis Q value Include summed data with Total Type Energy C S Systematic thermal O RI C E Experiment 30 keV 145Mev Figure 132 Validation plots window Figure 133 shows the C E data plotted as a histogram In order to see which reactions are responsible for the scatter about the ideal value of 1 0 click on the graph at a vertex of the histogram and the Validation data window shown in Figure 134 is displayed This shows the reactions that have C E values in the selected range Select a reaction and the data from Final for summed data the reactions are not in Final and for the experiment or from systematics are displayed The exact C E value is also shown This is necessary because the summary CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 119 data are for energies of 25 3 meV 30 keV 14 5 MeV and 20 MeV If the experimental data are not exactly at these energies then the exact C E calculated using interpolation where necessary may differ from the value shown in the list box The thickness of the histogram line can be altered by clicking on the Options Thick lines menu item this option has been selected in Figure 133 fr Validation plot m File Edit Options 14 5 MeV experimental data n 2n reactions 237 FS 99 values Number of Reactions 1E 03 1E 02 1E 01 1E 00 1E 01 1E 02 1E 03 C E value Figure 133
203. made and saved to the database by clicking the Save button A data point can be removed by clicking the Delete button A new data point can be added by clicking the Add button This displays the dialog shown in Figure 31 Clicking the No button displays the Add Integral data window shown in Figure 92 Enter target and reaction details in the first text box the dropdown list and with the Final state radio buttons Enter the integral data in the text boxes and tick the Use check box The default cross section unit is b but by clicking the button it is possible to toggle between b and mb for data entry Note that the button should be clicked prior to data entry Select a reference from the dropdown list Clicking the Add button will save the data in the Parameter database Note that the Save button actually becomes the Close C E button which acts as a shortcut to displaying the Integral C E window when a change to the data is not in progress Clicking this will close the Integral data window as does the Close button and open the Integral C E window Figure 94 dd Integral data Target Cu 65 4g 108m format Reaction np w Use Spectrum ng sicasc X sec 2115E 2 b s Delta X sec 1 058E 3 b Reference v No reference available Add Final state Og Om On 9 Tota Figure 92 The Add Integral data window The reactions that can be selected in the Add Integral data window
204. mber Double 8 QI Number Double 8 LR Number Integer 2 NR Number Integer 2 NP Number Long 4 History Text 255 Suspect points Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Point number Number Long 4 Ratio Number Single 4 Interpolation law Number Integer 2 Treated Number Byte 1 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 194 SAFEPAQ II Target Name Type Size Target number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 Uncertainty Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Group number Number Long 4 Energy Number Double 8 DeltaSquared Number Double 8 9 The definition of the EXFOR mdb database tables Conferences Name Type Size Code Text 11 Name Text 56 CountryCodes Name Type Size ID Number Integer 2 Name Text 30 Code Text 3 Cross section Name Type Size Full access Number Long 4 Point number Number Long 4 Energy Number Double 8 Delta energy Number Double 8 Cross section Number Double 8 Delta cross section Number Double 8 Evaluated Graphs Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Status Number Integer 2 Library Text 50 File name Text 50 Graphs Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Status Number Integer 2 File name Text 50 Journals Name Type Size Code Text 10 Name Text 50 LabCodes Name Type Size Code Text 3 ID Number Integer 2 Name Text 60 Private Cross section Name Type Size Full a
205. mber used in the databases to identify the reaction is sometimes required This can be found so long as the reaction exists in Parameter by clicking on the reaction name at the top left of the window a ToolTip showing the reaction number is displayed when the cursor hovers over the reaction name User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 53 The energy and cross section values in the grid are displayed to six decimal places The database holds these values to higher precision and especially if changing the value of a cross section at an energy point it is necessary to know the values more precisely This is possible by selecting a single row and holding the cursor over the grid a ToolTip is shown with the values to twelve decimal places max 7 Reaction data Final ADL 3 1 1 1 874200E 07 1 347500E 07 1 984100E 07 2 057300E 07 2 033300E 07 2 100000E 07 2 846526E 01 2 831100E 01 2 817553E 01 2 769257E 01 2 731715E 01 2 657 400E 01 Co 59 n 2n Co 58g 45 points Point Energy eV Cross Section b Selection 1 062700E 07 0 000000E 00 i 1 105400E 07 9 951442E 03 1 142000E 07 3 038947E 02 Jo 1 215300E 07 8 541216E 02 15 1 251 900E 07 1 133914E 01 iea 1 325100E 07 1 625787E 01 1 361700E 07 1 832474E 01 Interpolation 1 434900E 07 2 175543E 01 1 range 1 471500E 07 2 315745E 01 1 1 544800E 07 2 538474E 01 Law 2 1 618000E 07 2 669599E 01 1 654600E 07 2 741544E 01 1
206. mean value for each reaction na np 0 00001 1e 07 e ee eee ee 1e 08 1e 09 XS ratio 1e 10 E tet 1e 12 5 B 1e 13 enc d ee eet 1e 14 Lr rriuub a rgnnnub ar rrdnuub 0 dp pginub d 01 LLL 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 En keV Figure 1 Values of n p n y and n o n y cross sections for bd and Ag targets respectively calculated by TALYS These facts have been later supported theoretically by statistical model calculations which show a constant and energy independent ratio of n p n y and n a n y cross sections from about 1 meV up to 50 100 keV This is demonstrated in Figure 1 where the results of calculations with the code TALYS for Pd and Ag targets are shown It is obvious that this feature can be used to approximate the unknown low energy component of n p and n a reactions from the known n y cross sections and smoothly join these data with the excitation curve above the effective threshold This feature was first used by H Gruppelaar in 1981 to estimate n p User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 217 components in Co and Co evaluations 2 from the total absorption cross section and later in a slight modified version adjustable MF2 data used to generate data for the resolved resonance region satisfying the thermal n p or n a cross sections for a small number of reactions on targets in the deformed region between 150 A l
207. menu item e Inte ral C E graph i grap J c Eg File Edit Options C E 0 8 0 6 fng f82h asdng vanad asc sneg 2 fns 5min cf252 flux 1 cf252 flux 1 fzk ss316 rez DF fng sic asc sneg 1 fns 7hour cf252 flux 1 cf252 flux 1 cf252 flux 1 fzk ss316 Integral C E for Fe 56 n p Mn 56 C E 1 2585 CIE 1 2265 z4 t 0665 CIE 3 0492 CE s ap 999 8 1 03 MMMM o st CIE wm Neutron Spectrum CCFE Fusion Figure 97 The Integral C E graph window Since EAF 2007 it is possible to display the C E values in another way Selecting the Integral data Extended C E plot menu item in the main window checks it and means that when the Plot button in Figure 94 is clicked then the Integral C E graph Extended window shown in Figure 98 is displayed In this case the reaction rate for each spectrum is calculated and the point is placed at the energy corresponding to the maximum reaction rate The energy interval such that 90 of the reaction rate is contained is calculated and used to plot an energy error bar Such a plot shows clearly the energies at which the integral data can be used to validate the EAF data User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 27 Integral C E graph Extended Jog File Edit Options 1 50 C E 0 50 0 00 0E00 Integral C E for W 182 n p Ta 182 1E07 2E07 3E07 4E07 5E07 6E07 Energy eV Figure 98 The I
208. n data Generate Master database menu item If Master already contains data then the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 110 is displayed prior to deleting any data It takes a significant time 7 hours to generate Master SAFEPAQ II Master contains 66258 reactions dU Delete all reactions From Master Figure 110 Confirmation dialog prior to deleting reactions from Master The next step is to find modifications to the data in Master This is divided into two stages termed preliminary modifications and modifications In the first stage three types of preliminary modifications are considered Firstly any pre User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 87 equilibrium modifications to capture data at high energies are found SAFEPAQ II carries out this step by comparing the Master data with that predicted by systematics at 14 5 MeV Only reactions with a multiplicity of one are considered to avoid issues with branching Any reactions where data in Master Systematics 0 5 are noted and the additional data are generated using the Zhixiang and Delin formula for direct capture This generates 119 39 in the case of a non extended energy library data points in the energy range 1 60 20 MeV these are stored in the Additional data table of Parameter and a modification of Mod type 9 is stored for the reaction Click on the Reaction data Find all pre equilib preliminary modifications menu item to carry out t
209. n is clicked then the editing boxes used in the modification process are used If the No button is clicked then the Add 0 0253 eV experimental data window shown in Figure 32 is displayed iin 0 0253 eV experimental data Targets Reactions U 231 l nf U 232 n a U 233 n g Cross section b Delta x sec b UseB Use R Use Y Add 3 500000E 01 5 000000E 00 No No No S880000E 01 8 000000E 01 No No Yes Energy eV 2 530000E 02 2 530000E 02 Modify Delete Mughabghab S F Atlas of neutron resonances Elsevier 2006 Close CCFE Fusion Figure 30 The 0 0253 eV experimental data window Enter target and reaction details in the first text box the dropdown list and with the Final state radio buttons Enter the experimental data in the text boxes and check the usage flags that apply The default cross section unit is b but by clicking the button it is possible to toggle between b and mb for data entry Note that the button should be clicked prior to data entry Select a reference from the dropdown list Clicking the Add button will save the data in the Parameter database Note that the flags must be chosen so that either none or only a single data point is used for branching renormalisation or validation However if duplicates are present then the last entered Yes User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 25 value is retained any ex
210. n n a 2 Library summary C ANITA group data wo EAF 2005 0 EAF 2005 1 EAF 2007 0 EAF 97 0 EAF 99 0 EFF 24 EFF 2 4 MDF E eff24 mdb I Safepaq_DotNet Cross section data eff 24 Conversion options C MF4 C MF6 high E data C MF32 C MF33 C 1 material per file Header FEND MEND TEND Number 79 Total reactions 647 74 65 29 51 Add Delete Close Figure 26 The Library summary window User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 22 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion This is displayed by clicking on the Libraries Library summary menu item or the twentieth toolbar button This shows the available sources the conversion options used and the types and numbers of reactions Having read a new library using Figure 25 it is necessary to add this to the summary by clicking the Add button in Figure 26 This displays the Add library window shown in Figure 27 Any libraries not entered into the summary are displayed clicking the Add button will add the selected library Note that if you wish to re read a source library then it is necessary to first remove it from the summary using the Delete button in Figure 26 then to read it using Figure 25 and then to add it to the summary again using Figure 26 and Figure 27 J Add library Libraries not yet added Add Close Figure 27 The Add library window
211. n p Na 24 IRDF 2002 0 O Mg 24 n p Na 24n IRDF 2002 0 3 Mg 28 n p Na 28 TALYS 6a o Om Si 31 n p Al1 31 TALYS 6a 0 On i 32 n p A1 32 TALYS 6a 0 O Total P 32 n p 3i 32 TALYS 6a O AI P 33 n p 3i 33 TALYS 6a 0 35 n p P 35 TALYS 6a 0 36 n p P 36 TALYS 6a 0 r 38 n p C1 38 TALYS 6a 0 r 38 n p C1 38m TALYS 6a 0 r 39 n p C1 39 TALYS 6a 0 r 4l n p Cl 4l TALYS 6a 0 r 42 n p C1 42 TALYS 6a 0 K 42 n p Ar 42 TALYS 6a 0v Figure 107 The Reaction search window Another way of making global changes of the data source for sets of reactions is by considering the Quality score for the reaction see Table 4 By clicking on the Reaction data Change data source for score 0 to TALYS for reaction type menu item and then selecting a reaction type such as n 2n from the submenu then all n 2n reactions that have score 0 and with a data source not set to TALYS will be changed to data from the current TALYS version The submenu shows fifteen reaction types explicitly All the remaining reaction types can be changed together by clicking the Others menu item After making significant changes to the reaction list it is sensible to check that all the specified data sources for each CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 85 reaction actually contain data This can be done by clicking the Reaction data Check Sources in reaction list menu item which displays the Check sources in reaction list window shown
212. named eat xml located in the cross section data folder SAFEPAQ II is a Windows application and therefore tends to work with Windows style files However files are available from various sources and it may be that all the files in a folder are actually in UNIX style the differences relate to the character s delimiting the end of each line In such a case it is necessary to convert them from one style to the other While this is easy using standard tools if there are only a few files in cases where there are many such as a single files for each target in an evaluated library the standard tools can be very time consuming Clicking the Tools Convert UNIX PC type files menu item to display the Convert UNIX PC file types window shown in Figure 168 Clicking the Browse button to open the Browse For Folder dialog where the folder containing the files for conversion can be selected Choose how the files are to be converted by selcting one of the radio button options and then click the Convert button to do the conversion The window is closed by clicking the Close button Da Convert UNIX PC file types Convert all files of type UNIX to PC Convert all files of type PC to UNIX Path Safepaq_DotNet Decay data u Figure 168 The Convert UNIX PC file types window SAFEPAQ II is continually improved with new features and errors in the coding corrected This is reflected in the Version number displayed in th
213. nctional form shown in equation 4 to be used for the trend curve o 10 at fix yx 4 Checking the Options Curve type Logarithmic menu item causes the functional form shown in equation 5 to be used for the trend curve In equations 4 and 5 x can be A Z or s o Ax 5 The order 1 2 or 3 of the polynomial used for the fitting in equation 4 can be chosen from the Options Curve order submenu If the curve order is 1 then yand dare 0 if 2 then dis 0 and if 3 then all of a f y are non zero Note that if a Logarithmic curve is chosen then the Options Curve order menu item is disabled The trend line can be displayed as a thick or thin line depending on whether the Options Draw lines thick menu item is checked or cleared The form of the equation can be displayed in the Main window status bar by clicking the Options Display equation menu item A trend line can be stored by clicking the Options Store trend menu item this trend can then be used in the Validation plots window Figure 149 At the present time details for a large subset of the reactions and trend curve options can be stored Omax A and Omax s trends for the Logarithmic curve can be stored for the reaction types n 2n n 3n n 4n n p nd n t n h and n a Trends for the same reactions for the Power curve can be stored for any of the Curve order options and for any of the eleven y axis options not just Omax Values of the coefficients in
214. ned neutron spectra Clicking the Integral data Neutron spectra menu item displays the Neutron spectra window shown in Figure 85 Note that at the present time there are no integral data stored for deuteron or proton induced reactions Consequently there is no option to view spectra for these particles The available neutron spectra which are stored in the Parameter database are displayed followed by the type a description and reference A spectrum can be removed by clicking the Delete button Note that 1f integral data are already stored for a neutron spectrum then it is not possible to delete the spectrum the Delete button is grayed out A further spectrum can be added by clicking the Add button which displays the Add spectrum window shown in Figure 86 A name and description are entered in the text boxes and a type number of groups and weighting is chosen from the dropdown list The file containing the spectrum is selected using the browse button and the reference is selected from the dropdown list Note that the file should be in standard ASCI format character at the start of comment lines with the asc extension Clicking the Add button will add the spectrum to the database Neutron spectra fns_5min fns_ hour fusion_flux fzk_1 fzk_2 fzk_ss316 Type VITAMIN4 175 groups Description Contains the flux used at Karlsruhe d Be source spectrum amp 1 175 group flat
215. ns Co 59 n q l Co 60 n n 1 3 Ni 60 n p l Ni 6lin n p 1 Ni 62 n n d l Ni 62 n 2np 1 Ni 6z n t l Ni 63 n 2nd l Ni 63 n n t l Ni 63 n 3np 1 Ni 64 n 2nt l Ni amp a ap 1 v Figure 143 The Reactions to daughter window User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 129 Analysis If all the reactions in the listbox need to be printed then this can be done by clicking the Print All button The window can be closed by clicking the Close button The data in both the Final database and in the various Data sources are so extensive that a statistical analysis can reveal underlying trends and pinpoint reactions for improvement This approach is similar to that carried out to produce the systematics the main difference is that for the systematics experimental data were considered while for the present analysis library data are used It is expected that properties such as the maximum of an excitation function and the energy at which the maximum occurs should be reasonably smooth functions of A Z and the asymmetry parameter s Plotting these and also cross sections at particular energies against say A will give scatter plots that can have trend lines displayed A full description of this Statistical Analysis of Cross Sections SACS is given in reference 14 To use these tools click on the Tools Cross section analysis menu item to display the Cross section analysis window shown in Fi
216. nt data in a standard form Each database is given a name lt source gt mdb The design of the database is given in generic mdb this database is copied and then renamed for each new database Using the Documenter feature in Access the definitions of the tables in generic mdb are given in Section 3 The fields in each table are shown Final database database The fields in each table are mostly self explanatory note that in the Reaction table the last six fields are given names taken directly from ENDF nomenclature Note that wherever a floating point data number is used it has a Double type and that Long integers are used in cases where more than one or two possibilities exist Similar conventions are used in the design of all the remaining databases The ibrary mdb database contains the RawData table that describes the location of the source data file and the name of the database A series of Boolean variables describe the format of the data and enable the reading and conversion to database CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 177 form to be achieved The tables in the ibrary mdb database are defined in Section 4 The Reaction table is the same as that defined for generic mdb The parameter mdb database contains all the version dependent information The tables in the parameter mdb database are defined in Section 5 The master mdb database tables are very similar to those in generic mdb but a
217. nted to the default printer or User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 42 SAFEPAQ II copied to the clipboard by selecting the File Print or Edit Copy menu items respectively Note that the systematics values at 14 5 MeV and 30 keV are also shown if available EXFOR plot m File Edit Ag 107 n g L W WESTON K K SETH E G BILPUCH H W N 5 00E 0 4 00E 0 3 00E 0 2 00E 0 c o Qo 0 o o o O 1 00E 0 0 00E 0 0 00E 0 5 00E 4 1 00E 5 1 50E 5 2 00E 5 2 50E 5 Energy eV Figure 59 The EXFOR plot window An additional menu item File Save image is available to save the current master plot to disk as an image placeable Windows metafile format wm This has the advantage that the particular image of the set of selected EXFOR sorces can be viewed later even if the selected set has subsequently been altered The image can be viewed by clicking the View image View old button on Figure 49 which displays the EXFOR image window shown in Figure 61 Note that this button will only be enabled if there is an available image for the reaction All images are saved in the folder graphs shown in the Graphs folder text box on the Source database disk specified in the Settings window Figure 1 A further use of images to construct a book is described later Experimental data that are too recent to be present on the EXFOR CD ROMs may be available from other sources If CCFE F
218. nteger 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 Multiplicity Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Source Text 50 UncertData Name Type Size Uncert number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Use B Yes No 1 Use R Yes No 1 Use V Yes No 1 EV Number Double 8 EH Number Double 8 DeltaV Number Double 8 DeltaH Number Double 8 Delta20 Number Double 8 Delta60 Number Double 8 E20 Number Double 8 UncertDataThreshold Name Type Size Uncert number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Use B Yes No 1 Use R Yes No 1 Use V Yes No 1 VAR Number Double 8 Delta60 Number Double 8 E20 Number Double 8 WapstraMass Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 Mass Number Double 8 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 190 SAFEPAQ II 6 The definition of the master mdb database tables Cross section Interpolation Reaction Target 7 The definition of the cache mdb database tables Cross section Interpolation Reaction CCFE Fusion Name Reaction number Point number Energy Cross section Name Reaction number Range number Range limit Interpolation law Name Reaction number Source ZA target target ZA daughter daughter Multiplicity Source daughter Source Multiplicity Name Target number ZA
219. ntegral C E graph Extended window The File Print Edit Copy and Options Axis scale menu items are the same as in the Integral C E graph window Figure 97 If the Options x axis ticks menu item is clicked then a sub menu opens with the menu items 1 6 shown Checking one of these displays the graph with the corresponding number of x axis tick marks In Figure 98 six tick marks are shown If the Options y axis ticks menu item is clicked then a submenu opens with the menu items 1 5 shown Checking one of these displays the graph with the corresponding number of y axis tick marks In Figure 98 three tick marks are shown If the Options Show values menu item is clicked then a submenu opens with the menu items None All Band and Points shown Checking All displays the mean energy and C E values next to each point and the library uncertainty next to the error band Band only displays the library uncertainty next to the error band Points only displays the mean energy and C E values next to each point None removes all values If the Options Legend menu item is clicked then a submenu opens with the menu items None Right and Bottom shown Checking Right displays the spectrum name for each point in a legend at the right of the graph Checking Bottom displays the User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 78 SAFEPAQ II spectrum name for each point in a legend at the bottom of the graph None removes the legend The abo
220. nterpolation is required to form the sum and this can take some time Following the calculation an additional reaction will appear in the Reaction list box and the button caption will become Plot BR and the button will be enabled Clicking on this button will display the Branching ratio visualisation window shown in Figure 78 This is similar to the Data visualisation window Figure 68 but with a reduced set of options There is no toolbar but the status bar is used to display information on the points In Figure 78 the lower of the orange symbols has been clicked information on it is shown in the status bar Clicking the File Print menu item prints the plot to the current printer Clicking the Edit Copy menu item copies the plot to the clipboard Clicking the Options xX y axes menu item displays a submenu that shows the four axes combinations that can be used to plot the data Checking the Options Show symbols for data points menu item plots the data points that make up each curve Checking the Overplot experimental menu item plots the experimental data points If this is not checked then information on the curve data points can be shown in the status bar Note that if there are a large number of data points then plotting the graph can take a significant time User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 60 SAFEPAQ II X Branching ratio visualisation ka x File Edit Options Na 23 n y Na 24 1 0E 00 Bran
221. nuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 172 SAFEPAQ II Find all branching modifications 99 Find all experimental modifications 101 Find all systematics modifications 101 Find all repeated zero modifications 101 Find all greater than 60 MeV modifications 101 Find all threshold modifications using Wapstra 101 Find all gt 1E 5 eV non threshold modifications 101 Find all non threshold first point modifications 101 Find all suspect interpolation laws 102 Find interpolation law modifications manually 102 g Negative cross sections 106 Missing high energy data 106 Megative energies 106 Non threshold reactions with E lt gt 1E 5 eV 107 Non threshold reactions with any xs 0 107 Threshold reactions with other than 1st point xs 0 107 Missing 60 MeV data point 107 Repeated energy points 108 Inconsistent Interpolation ranges 108 Inconsistent Cross section data 108 Inconsistent number of data points 108 Threshold reactions with wrong 1st point 108 Threshold reactions with wrong 1st law 109 Missing data above 20 MeV 109 Data points gt 60 Mev 109 Q value 0 109 Inconsistent non elastic data at 14 5 MeV 109 Inconsistent non elastic data at 40 0 MeV 109 Wrong energy order For points 1 and 2 109 Very steep gradient 110 Incorrect multiplicities 110 h Generate summary of Final database 116 l Generate multi group data 117 Generate uncertainty dat
222. olorado USA 1996 9 RA Forrest The European Activation System EASY 2007 overview UKAEA FUS 533 2007 10 RA Forrest J Kopecky and J Ch Sublet The European Activation File EAF 2007 neutron induced cross section library UKAEA FUS 535 2007 11 RA Forrest The European Activation File EAF 2007 deuteron and proton induced cross section libraries UKAEA FUS 536 2007 12 RA Forrest The European Activation File EAF 2007 decay data library UKAEA FUS 537 2007 13 RA Forrest The European Activation File EAF 2007 biological clearance and transport libraries UKAEA FUS 538 2007 14 RA Forrest and J Kopecky Statistical analysis of cross sections A new tool for data validation Fus Eng Design 82 73 90 2007 15 RA Forrest Data requirements for neutron activation Part I Cross sections Fus Eng Design 81 2143 2156 2006 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 176 SAFEPAQ II Appendix 1 SAFEPAQ II design 1 Overall structure New EAF file Modify based on parameter database Source Source database files files i ES Select based on hea C parameter database Parameter database Test database e w Validation and documentation based on parameter Library database Cache database 2 Database design The various source libraries each require a separate database to contain all the releva
223. on at a reference energy to be entered in the text boxes Select the data points that this modification should apply to and the View button becomes enabled Clicking this will plot the modified data If this is not correct then clicking the Revert button will plot the original data If the change is useful then it can be saved as a modification for the reaction by clicking the Save button The Resonance integral tab Figure 73 contains two buttons Clicking Select will select data points in the range 0 5 eV 100 keV Clicking Calculate will calculate the resonance integral for the reaction and show the result in the first text box Note that this text box cannot be edited Enter the new resonance integral value in the second text box Clicking the View button will plot the modified data If this is not correct then clicking the Revert button will plot the original data If the change is useful then it can be saved as a modification for the reaction by clicking the Save button User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 56 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion It is possible to save the selected data points as a scrap of data This is saved with the file name specified in the text box on the Save tab Figure 74 in the folder scraps shown in the Scrap folder text box on the Source database disk specified in the Settings window Figure 1 The interpolation law applying to the selected points is also saved Note that it is not possible
224. oss section integral J BUE SE MET ers taste bed eda 46 Law1 Ej JR E of a BE yE dE oileE BE Ye e 47 et E 4 BG ED Ky E3 E User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 206 SAFEPAQ II Law 2 J E E EL A BE a BE yE2 dE E aA BAE AE aBE BBE yBE dE E lE BA aB E yA BB E yos aac E K BA c aB EZ EF X yA BB B3 E yBCE ed Law 3 J E E e A Bin E a BE yE dE 49 ie aA BAE yAE aBln E BBE ln E yBE ln E dE E Using the standard integrals shown in A6 A8 this integral can be evaluated as shown in equation 50 E SUBEN QAE V PAE V yAE aBE ln E G amp BE V BBE E V BBE 55 2 7 X BE In E V BE r la A B E V BQA B E y 3A B E YB 6a 3E 2yE E In E fe Law 4 E J E E e FE a BE yE dE E A A eE la BE yE Je ie su B 2yE dE 1 gl 24 BE e PF fa e E BE Ei Je orm NE 2ME 51 1 o o PE BE E a BE yE e SEADETE E o B A Sh aB BB 2y B BB 27 E stg Law 5 E E JG E e f E a BE yE dE ef aE BET 4 yEP gg 52 E E Equation 52 can be solved trivially except for three values of B 1 2 3 In these cases a log term is introduced CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 207 aE BEC yr J E E e prm 1
225. oves all data points with Elow lt Energy lt Ehigh Note thal Renom by lin energy BA Multiplies each data point between EH Elow and 20Me Ehigh b Modification of Q value Replaces QI in the Reaction entry by the new Q value Eref v Specification Close CCFE Fusion Figure 163 The Modification types window It has been found that due to changes in decay data that the isomeric state of a target nuclide can need to be changed As an example in EAF 2007 Ir 194m was long lived while Ir 194n was short lived For EAF 2010 the new decay data reverses these two isomers and now In 194n requires cross section data Unfortunately no data sources have cross section data for this target By clicking on the Tools Change target isomeric state menu item that displays the Change target isomeric state window shown in shown in Figure 164 it is possible to specify the target nuclide in the text box and the old and new isomeric states in the dropdown list Clicking the Change button will make the necessary changes in the Parameter Master and Final databases Change target isomeric state Nuclide Ir 194 59 108 format m New state Figure 164 The Change target isomeric state window Old state If SAFEPAQ II crashes during data entry it is possible that the Final database can be left in a damaged state Typically there is an entry for a reaction in the Parameter database but this is m
226. oxes Select a final state from the radio buttons and click the Add button to save the values in the database Add non threshold uncertainty Target H 3 Ag 108m format Reaction n g v EM 1 0E4 eV EH 1 0E5 eV E20 2 0E7 eV Delta 0 1 DeltaH 2 0 Delta20 1 5 Delta60 1 8 Final state add Og Om On Tot Cose Figure 37 The Add non threshold uncertainty window It is necessary that all n y and n f reactions have uncertainty data specifically Ey and Ey values Prior to starting to build the EAF library this can be checked by clicking on the Experimental data Find reactions with no non threshold uncertainty data menu item to display the Reactions with no uncertainty data window shown in Figure 38 Any displayed reactions should have uncertainty data added Reactions with no uncertainty data 5 reactions Ir 194n n g Ir 195g Ir 194nin g Ir 195n Pu 247 n g Pu 248 Es 257 n f Es 257 n qg Es 258 Figure 38 The Reactions with no uncertainty data window The uncertainty data for threshold reactions can be displayed by clicking on Experimental data View threshold uncertainty data or the fifteenth toolbar button to display the Threshold uncertainty data window shown in Figure 39 Click on a target to show the reactions present Click on a reaction to display the uncertainty values These values cannot be changed User manuat I
227. project Prior to EAF 2005 the size of final mdb was well below the 1 GB limit that is part of the Access specification However with the significant increase in the number of reactions from EAF 2005 this size became a real limitation In order to overcome this limit most of the tables containing multi group data the exception is Group 175F are transferred to the final_add mdb database and final mdb contains links to the tables in final_add mdb This change is transparent to the Visual Basic code but the location of final_add mdb is hard wired into final mdb This means that if the specified path does not exist on a computer that both Final databases are moved to then a crash will occur A similar problem occurs for the source databases e g talys5 mdb under certain circumstances If the procedure to generate a summary for validation has been carried out for the source database then links are included to parameter mdb of the current project Again if the source database is moved to another computer then these links will be incorrect and while the summary can be regenerated this can be time consuming for large source libraries The solution to these problems is to use the Linked tables tool available on the Tools menu of SAFEPAQ II This shows the current location held in the link and enables this to be changed to the correct path Note that when a new project is created the links in the new version of final mdb are automatically
228. r 2 ImportantNuc_2007 Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 LISO Number Integer 2 Import_2007 Number Integer 2 ImportantNucElem_2007 Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 LISO Number Integer 2 Import_2007 Number Integer 2 Element Text 2 Integral Data Name Type Size Exp number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Use Yes No 1 Spectrum ID Number Integer 2 Cross section Number Double 8 Delta Cross section Number Double 8 Source Text 5 CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 185 InterpMods Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source Text 50 E low Number Double 8 E high Number Double 8 E ref Number Double 8 X ref Number Double 8 factor Number Double 8 Add number Number Long 4 Exp number Number Long 4 Comment Text 50 KnownHazards Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 Isom Number Integer 2 CEDE Ing Number Single 4 CEDE Inh Number Single 4 Source Text 7 LevelDensity Name Type Size Nucleon Number Integer 2 a Number Double 8 PZ Number Double 8 PN Number Double 8 LevelDensityRIPL2 Name Type Size Z Number Integer 2 A Number Integer 2 aa Number Double 8 del Number Double 8 LineData Name Type Size Nuclide number Number Integer 2 STYP Number Byte 1 RTYP Number Single 4 Energy Number Double 8 DEnergy Number Double 8 Intensity Number
229. r 2 Symbol Text 2 Error factors Name Type Size MT Number Integer 2 f Number Double 8 name Text 50 ExpData Name Type Size Exp number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Use B Yes No 1 Use R Yes No 1 Use V Yes No 1 Energy Number Double 8 Cross section Number Double 8 Delta Cross section Number Double 8 Source Text 5 FinalSummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Cross section thermal Number Double 8 Cross section 30keV Number Double 8 Cross section 14MeV Number Double 8 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 184 SAFEPAQ II Resonance Integral Number Double 8 Cross section 40MeV Number Double 8 GammaGamma Name Type Size A Number Integer 2 Width Number Double 8 HighEnergy Factors Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Factor Number Double 8 Important_2003 Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 Important_2007 Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 Import Number Integer 2 ImportantDaughter_2007 Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Daughter Text 7 ImportantNuc_2003 Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 LISO Number Integer 2 Import_2003 Number Intege
230. r Byte 1 Score Number Byte 1 ExtScore Number Byte 1 Reaction Type Name Type Size MT Number Integer 2 Reaction Text 8 Reference Name Type Size Source Text 5 Reference Text 250 RIData Name Type Size RI number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Use B Yes No 1 Use R Yes No 1 Use V Yes No 1 RI Number Double 8 Delta RI Number Double 8 SourceData Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source daughter Number Integer 2 Source Multiplicity Number Integer 2 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 188 SAFEPAQ II Source MT Number Integer 2 Spectra Name Type Size ID Number Integer 2 Group number Number Integer 2 Flux Number Double 8 SpectraSummary Name Type Size ID Number Integer 2 Name Text 20 Structure Number Integer 2 Groups Number Integer 2 Description Text 200 Reference Text 10 StablesData Name Type Size ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 Spin Number Single 4 Parity Number Integer 2 Mass Number Double 8 Abundance Number Double 8 SystData Name Type Size Syst number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Use B Yes No 1 Use R Yes No 1 Syst30Data Name Type Size Syst number Number Long 4 ZA Number Long 4 l Number Integer 2 ZAD Number Long 4 ID Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Use
231. r half life and energy Clicking the Photon lines or Matter lines tabs displays further information on the emitted photons or particles Decay data viewer m File Edit View P Bx Ba lu dp x Nuclide Co 50 Ag 108m format Source JEFF 311 o Stable Spin and parity 5 Decay data Photon lines Matter lines E Beta Mass 59 93387 amu Biological hazard coefficients Sv Bq El Beta Half life 1 6634E 08 3 1557E 04 ecs v ingestion 3 4000E 09 C Alpha Alpha O 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 Inhalation 3 1000E 08 i Source ICRP 2 Beta 86773E 04 242055402 ey x BH sr Gamma 2 5038E 06 35219E402 H Transport B Preten A2 coefficient 0 40000 TBq Number of decay modes 1 Source A2 VALUE Decay mode s Branching ratio z B Ni 60 100 Clearance level Clearance 1 00000E 02 Ba kg Source IAEA G 1 7 Figure 21 The Decay data viewer window Clicking the Edit Copy decay data menu item or the second toolbar button places the information displayed on the main widow and the Decay data tab on the clipboard clicking the Edit Copy line data menu item or the third toolbar button places the information displayed on the Photon lines and Matter lines tabs on the clipboard Clicking the fifth toolbar button Navigator changes the nuclide symbol box so that nine nuclides are shown the current nuclide and the eight that User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 18
232. rce This is a similar process to generating summary data for Final discussed on page 116 This can be time consumming for large source libraries User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 124 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion Once the summary for the source has been generated the Libraries Validation plots menu item is enabled Clicking this displays the Validation plots Source window which is identical to Figure 132 except that the source name is displayed in the title bar The discussion given above for the various graphs plotted using Final data is relevant for source data the only differences are that the titles of the graphs show the data source being used At some point prior to opening the REPORT window and following the production of the Final database it is necessary to click on the Reaction data Set nuclides as targets menu item This will note which of the nuclides have cross section data and enter this into the NucSummary table in the Parameter database In SYMPAL one of the main pieces of documentation produced was the REPORT file This was a large printed book summarising all the EAF data It is judged that because of the highly interactive nature of SAFEPAQ II such a printed volume is of less interest Rather it is possible to view the same summary of data in a similar format as previously but for a single reaction at a time Clicking the Reaction dataJREPORT menu item or the twenty ninth toolbar button di
233. rce libraries m 19 Experimental OTIO oo eto a Nod e esate 24 EXFOR dU Jti cS ote d cietais rires upina erouer ENTIRE 35 ACUTE PETI M 47 Integral AAG RR 67 Reaction Udine E enel e RE DUM sssrini 78 Find all branching modifications eee crease eee e ee eene eren eene en netten seen na aeo 99 Find all experimental modifications eee ecce eres eerte ee eren nete 101 Find all systematics modifications eee ee ee eere eene eene eren eee en netten ae tnua 101 Find all repeated zero modifications eee e eee eere eerte eerte nete 101 Find all greater than 60 MeV modifications eeeeeee eee ener 101 Find all threshold modifications using Wapstra ceeeeee eee eren eene 101 Find all gt 1 E 5 eV non threshold modifications eere 101 Find all non threshold first point modifications reete 101 ZInalysisidacseestees cotes tud divise etu etulladeot eee Cu Iu Fel o o Lee o eC TREE isaste 129 Miscellaneous 1OGIS 142 Updating databases ii eene ics vestes e eode ae vaa pede ee ed oV un ea Serb epus 153 Summary of menu OH S essi tiet ovd d voee env ep eo ER vv a eed 168 TROL CR CUCOS Se cT av ie keraet RS HR TENE TEXTE CA OCT ERE 175 Appendix 1 SAFEPA Q II design eee ee eee eee eese eren eene n en en
234. rces with the selected reaction s final state or 99 are shown this enables the source of a split reaction to be changed to a source which only contains the total cross section If it is necessary to use summed data from a data source then the MT gt 200 check box must be checked so that this data source is available in the dropdown list The current source can be altered by clicking one of the sources in the dropdown list To make the change click the Change source button Before data are changed in the Parameter database the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 125 1s displayed If the source has been changed then click on the Change Master button to change data for this reaction in the Master database Now click on the Pre mods tab to start the next phase Single reaction Change the source of this reaction From we EFF 2 4 to JEFF 3 1 Figure 125 Confirmation dialog prior to changing data source Figure 126 shows the window with this tab selected Text in the window shows the number of pre modifications that exist for the reaction If this is greater than 0 then the Delete button is enabled and the existing pre modifications can be removed If any of the pre modifications is Ad hoc then this is noted at the bottom of the tab Now click the Find pre mods button to find any pre modifications required for the reaction Note that it is possible to use the existing Pre modifications by just clicking the Change Final button
235. re Pre mods x 2 This comparison is for Internal and External databases with the same reaction numbers Do you want to display the comparison window Figure 188 The confirmation dialog prior to comparing pre modifications Clicking the Tools Compare Modifications submenu item displays the Compare modifications window shown in Figure 189 Prior to the window appearing the confirmation dialog similar to Figure 188 is displayed This ensures that the comparison is being carried out between databases with the same reaction numbers The window shows reactions where there are differences in the modifications stored and that will be used to create Final The values in External are shown The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively bU 127 183 208 208 208 203 203 Reaction Number 4a Compare modifications Mod Type Elow Ehigh Eref Xref fact 401 reactions 8 LJ oe 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 1 0000E 05 7 3050E 01 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 1 0000E 05 1 3949E 02 0 0000E 00 1 00006 05 6 0000 07 1 49006 07 1 2000E 05 0 0000E 00 8 3 5 8 1 4 5 6 2000E 07 1 5000E 08 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 1 0000E 05 1 0000E 10 0 0000E 00 1 0000E 05 9 0460E 05 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 1 0000E Q0 2 1000E 07 6 0000E 07 0 0000E 00 0 000
236. re the options and a reference to it given in the Reference textbox A description of the entry is added to the Description textbox and today s date is automatically entered in the Date created textbox Typically the Response and Date finished textboxes are left blank Clicking the Save button stores the information in the Helpdesk mdb database following a confirmation dialog and clicking the Close button closes the window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 151 m Entry m Person Robin Forrest x Date created 10 9 2009 Type SAFEPAQ II Date finished Source Document ivl Reference Note in SAFEPAQ log Description Opening the Validation window from the Menu or Toolbar needs to disable the C T option Figure 170 The New entry window The details of a person already defined can be edited by clicking the Edit Person menu item which displays the Edit person window shown in Figure 171 Enter a Surname and click the Get person button to display the details of the person If more than one person with the same name has been defined then the gt and lt buttons allow details for each one to be displayed The Title First name and Organisation can be changed if required and the changes stored in the database by clicking the Save button Clicking the Close button closes the window Person m Title Firstname Robin Save Surname Forrest Organisation UKAEA
237. rent release Issue 8 has been updated to use Visual Basic NET running under the Windows XP operating system The Windows operating system has the great advantage of portability and SAFEPAQ II has been successfully installed at three external sites for use by CCFE s international collaborators It has been used in the production of the EAF 2001 EAF 2003 EAF 2005 EAF 2007 and EAF 2010 data libraries Significant changes and enhancements were made to SAFEPAQ II for the production of the data libraries produced for and after EAF 2007 The main reasons for the changes were the need to be able to treat data for deuteron and proton induced reactions with an upper energy of 60 MeV and to include the method of Statistical Analysis of Cross Sections SACS Issue 8 has further extended the analysis tools with several new features Contents TUT ODUCH ON C osis vvasa sas 1 ODIO GI VeS c e n RE VU P C ERU ER EE VER NOME Bebe EUR e VeR ECT DERE ionsar ssis 2 Organising 31355 oia ues ccietvetosie reget eppNbo suu soose ur uH ou Klee Coop U Lx DEN ERE RE RUNR MER ossos EE 2 Viewing CLA UA eb rm 2 PIL CH UNS EU meet EEA E UE 2 PPO CESSUN GC pic eT RUN 3 PRIVAT Y SUNG AA uscecaen poo ree rite eran qo ere tent do svesecauncdedepensedasedbusaceusbesscenerstetsonsess 3 Logging changes RETE I ETT TT 3 Getting SIUPOd anon eic er deo eq e Eon E PERDU e EPIS EVE anessa esensi ieies 4 Decay dali eei bita dee a eaa decere b MR e uM E uate veg pdt iee 12 Sou
238. riction on the above calculation of factors must be noted If the number of data point for a reaction is very large gt 32 767 then the data are thinned prior to plotting only every other point is plotted For such reactions the data source in the status bar is followed by thinned and because it may not be possible to click on the actual point before the discontinuity the ability to calculate factors is disabled for reactions with thinned data The Reaction data window shows the source of data in the title bar and the reaction above the data grid Note that if data from Final Master or Test are used then the original data source is also shown in lt gt brackets In addition if there are p pre modifications and m modifications then these are shown as p m following the original data source The number of data points is shown to the right of the reaction The point number energy and cross section are shown in the grid The various interpolation law ranges are shown in the lower list box and if points are selected in the grid then these are also indicated in the upper text boxes The selection of data points is linked to the Visualisation data window if points are selected there and the Reaction data window is open then the points in the grid are also shown selected The selected data can be copied to the clipboard by clicking the Copy button The entire grid can be printed by clicking the Print button The reaction nu
239. s submenu item this displays the Negative energy values window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 107 Negative cross section D reactions Close Figure 122 The Negative cross sections window The fourth test shows if any non threshold reactions have the first energy point z 1 x 10 eV To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Non threshold reactions with E lt gt 1E 5 eV submenu item this displays the Non threshold reactions with E lt gt 1E 5 eV window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The fifth test shows if any non threshold reactions have any data points with cross section 0 To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Non threshold reactions with any xs 0 submenu item this displays the Non threshold reactions with any xs 0 window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The sixth test shows if any threshold reactions have other than the first data points with cross section 0 To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Threshold reactions with other than 1st point xs 0 submenu item this displays the Non threshold reactions with other than 1st point xs 0 window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption Note that if reactions are shown in the list box then it may be possible to generate a set of modifications to correct them by click
240. s between Elow and Ehigh is changed to Int fact Note that when entering a value for Elow use a value gt than the value required 11 Additional cross section data between Elow and Ehigh given in Addnum Initial point of current data set is at E If E Enign then set Eref to Epign and Xref to 1 v value at Enign The 1 v values are scaled so as to join smoothly on to the current set If Enign lt E then interpolation law 5 extends up to Ey If Ej gt E then the existing points with E lt E lt Enigh are removed 12 The current data points with Ej lt E lt Egg are removed and the additional data between Elow and Ehigh given in Addnum are added The interpolation law of the scrap data is Int fact and the number of points is Eref CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 93 Mod type Description Diagrams 13 Current data in the range E gt Ej are removed and replaced with the additional data specified in Addnum The interpolation law is Int fact and the number of new data points is in Xref New data 14 Data points at Eref are changed by a factor 1 f where f fact Lower point by 1 f the higher if present by 1 f 1 D Erfe e 1 f Er Ever 15 The data point at Eref has its cross section value changed to Xref e Xr Ever 16 A new data point of
241. s all data points with Elow lt Energy lt Ehigh Note that mod implemented for no points gt Ehigh at this stage 6 Renormalise by linearly Multiplies each data point between Ej Elow and 60 MeV energy dependent branching Ehigh by factor f f fig fhign fmia CE Emia Enign Emia ratio Enign Eref faa Xref figs fact 7 Modification of Q value Replaces QI in the Reaction entry by the new Q value Eref 8 Change number of points Removes npt Addnum points from the start of cross section replaces by 1 point Xref at E Eref Adjusts NP in Reaction and Interpolation tables 9 Pre equilibrium addition Additional cross section data between Elow and Ehigh given in Addnum 10 Change interpolation law The interpolation law for points between Elow and Ehigh is changed to Int fact Note that when entering Elow use a value gt than the value required 11 1 v addition Additional cross section data between 1 x 10 eV Elow and Ey Ehigh given in Addnum Curve can go through Xref at Eref if required 12 Add a data scrap Additional data between Elow and Ehigh given in Addnum The interpolation law is Int fact and the number of points is in Eref 13 Data merge Additional data above Eref given in Addnum The interpolation law is Int fact and the number of point is in Xref 14 Change energy value Data points at Eref are changed by a factor 1 fact Lower point by 1 fact the
242. s menu item displays a submenu with three entries allowing the x axis range to be selected In Figure 135 the option O 250 has been checked User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 122 SAFEPAQ II Validation plot A m File Edit Options 14 5 MeV experimental data n 2n reactions 59FS vales e 86FS 0values e 7FS 0 values 237 FS 0 values 1E 01 1 R e M 1E 00 dee eet No AF Weed c et teo S An Aa 2 C E Value 1E 01 1 0 50 100 150 200 250 Atomic Mass A o Figure 135 Validation plot A window Returning to Figure 132 the third type of plot that of C E or C S as a function of the absolute value of Q value can be made by selecting the x y plot x axis Q value radio button Select the other options as in the case of a histogram then clicking the Plot button displays the Validation plot Q window shown in Figure 136 Figure 136 shows the C E data plotted as a function of the absolute value of the Q value In order to identify the various points click on one to see details presented in the status bar of the main window It is possible to print or copy the plot to the clipboard by clicking the File Print or Edit Copy menu items respectively The appearance of the graph can be altered clicking the Options Y axis menu item displays a submenu with five entries allowing the y axis range to be selected In Figure 136 the option E 1 E1 has b
243. s saved Add Interpolation modification J amp dd Mod type 10 new law 5 for Te 123 n a 5n 120 as a Modification Figure 119 Confirmation dialog prior to adding modification As modifications are saved they are also stored in the InterpMods table If there are any entries in this table as a result of a previous use of this window then the Automate button is enabled Clicking this checks each suspect reaction in turn and if there is an entry for this reaction with the same data source in the nterpMods table then the modification data are used to create a new modification without any confirmation dialog If the reaction has a different source then it is not treated and if it is not present in the nterpMods table then the Ignored flag is set When all the suspect reactions have been considered then the list box in Figure 118 shows only the reactions that have not been treated User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 104 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion Da Modifications 36009 reactions He 3 n g He 4 Low energy 2 20000E 07 eV He 3i n p H 3 Hiah P M He 3 n d H 2 igh energy 6 00000E 07 e He 4 n 2n He 3 Ref Energy 7 00000E 00 ev Li 6 n 2na H 1 Li 6 n n d He 4 Value at Ref 0 00000E 00 b Ext Li 6 n g Li 7 Factor 2 00000E 00 Ad hoc Li 6 n p He 6 Li 6 n t He 4 w Mod type Add a data scrap Comment v Delete all Mads for reaction Delete Mod Delet
244. s shown Note that if a particle production cross section is selected then the calculation of the C E values takes some time and the user is warned by a message in the Staus bar to have patience If the data are in Final then the Plot button is enabled its use is described below If the reaction is in Test then the Test button is enabled Selecting one of the spectra enables the Reaction rate button Clicking the Copy button places the entire contents of the data grid on the clipboard Clicking the Test button will expand the window change the heading of the third column from Final to Test change the values displayed in the grid and display another grid This enlarged window is shown in Figure 95 showing the multi group data calculated using Test and several new buttons and controls Integral C E Fe 56 n p Mn 56 Spectrum fnq_f82h asc fnq_sic asc ng vanad asc sneg 1 Intergral XS b Final xS b C E 3 313500E 02 3275243E 02 0 99589 3577400E 02 9 315459E 02 0 97265 3160100E 02 7 766019E 02 0 84781 1 073000E 01 1 029362E 01 0 35333 User manual Issue Figure 94 The Integral C E window 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 74 SAFEPAQ II Integral C E Fe 56 n p Mn 56 X Spectrum fng_f82h asc gt fng_sic asc fng_vanad asc sneg 1 175 groups fusion d Group Onn Cn amp wm Intergral xS b 9 313500E 02 9 577400
245. s shown by equation 7 Cg lol O VE EQ Messen hne 7 In the present version of SAFEPAQ II the following additional simplifications are used e A value of 0 5 is assumed for gy e A simple systematic is used for the radiative width as shown in equation 8 for targets with A 40 T 1593 A where A is the mass number of the target In cases where A gt 40 a table of widths stored in the Parameter database is used With these assumptions equation 6 can be used to calculate cross section values from 1 10 eV to Ex A similar treatment is used for the n f reactions In this case I is replaced by T It is assumed by default that y 0 235 eV for fissile targets and 7 10 eV for non fissile targets User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 216 SAFEPAQ II Appendix 6 Low Energy Approximation CCFE Fusion It has been demonstrated experimentally 1 that the low energy component of the n y n p or n a cross sections for targets with Q gt 0 have the same energy dependence namely 1 v connected to the resonance region The similarity in the shapes and distribution of resonances in these three reactions has also been demonstrated experimentally From this a plausible assumption can be formulated namely that the partial widths La L and I obey the same x distribution Porter Thomas which results in the similar behaviour of total widths I T and I with values close to a constant
246. search Target element Co v Target mass A 53 Target state 0 1 2 0 Reaction ng v Libraries satisfying the above criteria ADL 3 CENDL 2 1 EAF 2001 0 EAF 2001 1 EAF 2003 0 C EAF 2005 0 Ear 2006 1 Y Figure 28 The Library search window In most cases it is possible to use data from the original source libraries in constructing the new EAF library However for some reactions it is preferrable to use data that have been specially prepared for a previous EAF library In such a case data can be extracted from an existing Master Data File MDF that was prepared using SYMPAL The whole MDF should be stored in the folder mDF on the Source database disk and Cross section data folder specified in the Settings window Figure 1 The Extract data from MDF window shown in Figure 29 is used to extract the data This is displayed by clicking on the Libraries Extract data from MDF menu item The name of the MDF is entered in the first text box the name of the file where the extracted data are to be put is given in the second text box and the name of the Source ID the name used in Figure 24 is entered in the third Clicking the Extract button will read the whole MDF and copy data for the Source ID into the new file This can then be used as an additional source in the same way as any of the existing source libraries Extract data from MDF MDF name MDF eaf2003 Source f
247. sed in the visualisation described below but to select or view the original EXFOR data it is necessary to have access to the EXFOR CD ROMs The correct CD ROM must be present on the disk shown in the EXFOR disk text box in the Settings window Figure 1 SAFEPAQ II will warn the user Figure 48 if the wrong CD ROM is present in the drive load the correct CD ROM before clicking the OK button Note that it is necessary to physically put the correct disk in the drive before clicking the OK button or SAFEPAQ II will crash In the current version it is possible to store all the EXFOR data on a removable disk rather than a CD ROM To use this option the USB Drive option should be checked in the Settings window Figure 1 Note that the data must be in the Exfor disk EXFOR CD x folder where x n d p specifies the incoming particle EXFOR z A Put EXFOR CD 1 in the drive Figure 48 Warning that incorrect CD ROM present Note that an updated version of the CD ROMs has been provided by the NEA Data Bank There are some differences in the format and if the new version is used then the Original EXFOR CD check box on the Settings window Figure 1 must be cleared CDs containing EXFOR data for deuteron and proton induced reactions are available and must be used if the incoming particle is not a neutron The sources of data for a particular reaction can be viewed by clicking on EXFOR EXFOR sources or the eighth toolb
248. sent User manual can be viewed on line as a PDF To do this it is necessary to have a PDF viewer on your computer Enter the location of this in the Reader for pdf file text box in the Settings window Figure 1 To display the User manual click the Help View User manual menu item Note that the User manual must be named sAFEPAQ II User manual pdf and must be in the Extra Folder M Documents folder The details of the version of SAFEPAQ II that is being run can be found by clicking on Help About SAFEPAQ II to display the About SAFEPAQ II window shown in Figure 8 This shows date version username copyright and a short status report Gif About SAFEPAQ II SAFEPAQ IEL 7 July 2009 SAFEPAQ I is a processing code part 0 to replace SAFEPAG and SYMPAL based on Access BAS Y 2007 copio uKsca Fusion 2008 RF A Forrest System for Activation File Processing and Quality assurance Fully functional version using VB NET i ing still t implemented Comprehensive error trapping still to be implemented at Figure 8 The About SAFEPAQ II window Clicking on the System info button displays the Microsoft System Information window giving a large amount of information about the system Printing is possible from many of the windows such printing is to the default printer This can be changed by clicking the File Printer setup menu item to display the standard Print dialog where a printer can be selec
249. splays the Compare reaction sources window shown in Figure 176 This shows reactions where the data source is different between the Internal and External databases The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 155 External Source Internal Source 173 reactions He 3 n d H 2 EFF 2 4 JENDL 3 3 Li B n p He 6 EFF 2 4 IEAF 2001 B 11 n t Be 9 EFF 2 4 TALYS 6a C 12 n 2n C 11 RRDF 38 TALYS Ba C 12 n p B 12 JENDL 3 2 TALYS Ba O 16 n 2n 0 15 IEAF 2001 TALYS 6a D 17 n p N 17 JEF 2 2 TALYS Ba D 18 n pJN 18 ADL 3 TALYS Ba Figure 176 The Compare reaction sources window Clicking the Tools Compare References submenu item displays the Compare references window shown in Figure 177 This shows new references in External that are not in Internal The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively Clicking the Tools Compare Experimental data flags submenu item displays the Compare experimental data flags window shown in Figure 178 This shows data sets where the flags these show if the experimental data are used for branching renormalisation or validation are different between Internal and External for matching data sets In the grid headings I refers to the internal and E to the External databases The contents of the grid can be
250. splays the REPORT window shown in Figure 138 Select a target in the first list box and the reactions for that target are shown in the second list box Clicking a reaction shows a summary of the reaction in the data grid Data for all final states and their sum are displayed Values from Final the experimental data and systematics are displayed The modification history for each final state is shown in the History box Data for the reaction can be printed to the default printer by clicking the Print button Although in the future it may be implemented there is currently no facility to print out the whole REPORT file User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 125 fb REPORT Target f E 9 WR Na 23 n y uo Quantity Energy eV g m Na 22 Source JEF 2 2 JEF 2 2 m FS Spin 40 10 Mg 24 FS Energy eV 4 7230E 05 Mg 25 Systematics b 1 4500E 07 3 4933E 04 Mo Exp Thermal b 2 5300E 02 1 3000E 01 4 3000E 01 5 6000E 01 Reaction n g ER NIS n 2n Exp 14 5 MeV 1 4700E 07 2 4000E 04 n n d Exp RI b 4 0000E 02 2 8000E 01 3 1100E 01 En XS Thermal b 1 2848E 01 3 0018E 01 4 2366E 01 n n t X5 30 keV b 5 2557E 06 1 2777E 05 1 8033E 05 n h S 14 5 MeV b 2 4036E 04 8 0094E 05 3 2045E 04 ie RI b 7 1982E 02 1 7500E 01 2 4698E 01 n n 3a Q value eV 6 9593E 06 6 4871E 06 n 2na Score 2 2 History g Pre equilibrium addition Renormalise to systematics Renormalise
251. ssue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 30 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion until the Modify button is clicked Then click on the Save button to save the change to the Parameter database If the change is not required then click the Cancel button Data for a reaction can be removed from the database by clicking the Delete button To add a new uncertainty value click the Add button which displays the Add threshold uncertainty window shown in Figure 40 X e Threshold uncertainty data Targets Reactions H 2 na Delta 2 00000E 01 H 3 n t He 3 n d Us no Add Li n 2n ae E20 200000E 07 eV Be 9 e Modify B 10 B1 Delete C12 C 13 N 14 N 15 0 16 M Deltab0 2 00000E 01 Close Figure 39 The Threshold uncertainty data window Add threshold uncertainty Target K 39 59 108m format Reaction n n v E20 2 0E7 Delta 0 5 Delta60 0 5 Add Final state Og Om On Total Figure 40 The Add threshold uncertainty window Enter the target in the first text box select the reaction from the dropdown list and enter the required values in the remaining three two for a non extended library text boxes Select a final state from the radio buttons and click the Add button to save the value in the database It is possible to check if all threshold reactions have uncertainty data this can be checked by clicking on the Experimental data Find reactions
252. story Name Target number ZA l Name Reaction number Point number Energy Cross section Next Energy Next Cross section Name Reaction number Point number Energy Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Group number Cross section Name Reaction number Source ID Group number Cross section User manual Issue 8 March 2010 191 Number Integer 2 Number Integer 2 Number Long 4 Text 255 Type Size Number Integer 2 Number Long 4 Number Integer 2 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 Number Double 8 Number Double 8 Number Double 8 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 Number Double 8 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Integer 2 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Integer 2 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 Type Size Number Long 4 Number Integer 2 Number Long 4 Number Double 8 CCFE Fusion 192 Group 172V Link Group 172W Link Group 172W Source Group 175F Group
253. sue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 105 Add Modification Target C2 Ag 108m format Reaction n 2n vi Daughter state Og Om On Total Mod type Renormalise over range to value at Ref Energy Low energy 1 0E6 eV Mid range High energy 6 0E7 eV Ref energy 1 45E7 eV Value at Ref p45 b Factor 0 0 Add new points 0 Figure 121 The Add modification window If the modification adds a Data scrap Mod Type 12 then a File name list box and set of Adjust to fit radio buttons are shown very similar to those in Figure 75 These need to be completed before clicking the Add button If modifications that were added Ad hoc are available in a previous EAF database then these can be reused so long as data for the reaction in Parameter have not been changed saving a great deal of effort To do this click the Reaction data Process Ad hoc modifications menu item that displays the Process Ad Hoc modifications window This is very similar to Figure 113 but displays modifications not preliminary modifications The database to be used is shown this is the same as the one selected when comparing with an External database see page 154 Before use it is necessary to click the Check button to ensure that the External Parameter database is sufficiently recent the Kind and Status fields must be present As in the case of pre modifications a range of Mod numbers can be considered as well
254. t 165 in the JENDL 3 library During the development of the TALYS code 3 this idea of the low energy treatment of the non threshold n p and n a reactions has been included For normalization of the n p and n a data either the thermal n p and n a cross sections if experimentally known or values derived from o n p o n y or o n a o n y ratios calculated by TALYS can be used This approximation is termed the Low Energy Approximation LEA it can be applied to two groups of n p and n a reactions with resolved resonance region in the n y MT 102 channel in SAFEPAQ II 1 The thermal cross section for the n p or n a reaction is known In this case the n y component between 10 eV and Ey including the resolved resonance region is merged with the n p or n a data by means of a Mod type 18 preliminary modification and the low energy ny component is then normalised to the experimental value of np or n a thermal cross section 2 Ifthe thermal cross section for the n p or n a reaction is not known then the ratio olo at Do is calculated by TALYS and this ratio is used to derive from the known n y cross section the n p or n a thermal value 6 as shown in equation 1 c c x o o NEEE BARS EITEN SERET 1 It should be noted that in both cases the resolved resonance region if available in the capture reaction is adopted between 10 eV and Ey An illustration of the use of this appro
255. t necessary to select a final state lA Create n g scrap using SRA Target Co 58 4g 108m format Thermal xs 1 9000E 02 b Final Resonance energy 10 0 eV H n Radiative width 2 6500E 00 eV On Spin factor 0 5 Total Upper energy EH 5 9E 2 eV File name Co 58_n g_LowE Experimental RI 7 0000E 03 b SRA RI 2 9340E 02 b SRA RI Exp RI 4 1914E 02 Figure 77 The Create n g scrap using SRA window In the Targets and sources window Figure 67 it is possible to visualise branching ratio data This is done by clicking on the Plot BR button Note that the caption on this button and whether it is enabled vary depending on the reaction selected In most of the libraries used by SAFEPAQ II reactions that have more than one final state only have reactions to the User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 59 separate final states but not the sum present Cache is able to also contain the sum but before a branching ratio can be plotted it is necessary that the sum be calculated If a reaction is selected with a final state of 0 1 or 2 and the sum has not already been calculated then the button shows the caption Calc tot Clicking this will form the sum of the data to the final states and store the total in Cache Note that if all the final states have data on the same energy grid then the calculation is fairly fast even with a large number of points However if the energy grid differs then i
256. ta submenu item displays the Compare uncertainty data window shown in Figure 192 This shows reactions where there are differences in the uncertainty data values for non threshold reactions The values in External are shown The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 163 6a Compare uncertainty data Reaction P H l n glH 2 H 2 n g H 3 He 3 n g He 4 Li B n g Li Li 7 n gLi 8 Be n g Be 8 Be 3 n a Be 10 Be 10 n g Be 11 EV eV EH eV Delta DeltaH Delta20 Delta60 930 reactions 1 00000E 04 1 00000E 05 2 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 1 00000E 04 1 00000E 05 2 00000E 01 1 00000E 00 5 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 1 00000E 02 1 00000E 05 6 07000E 01 1 00000E 00 5 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 1 00000E 05 1 00000E 05 4 00000E 01 1 00000E 00 1 00000E 00 1 00000E 00 1 00000E 03 1 00000E 06 3 33000E 01 1 00000E 00 5 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 1 20820E 05 1 20820E 05 5 00000E 00 1 00000E Q0 1 00000E 00 1 00000E Q0 1 00000E 04 1 00000E 05 3 75000E 01 1 00000E 00 5 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 1 00000E 03 1 00000E 05 1 00000E 00 1 00000E 00 5 00000E 01 5 00000E 01 Figure 192 The Compare uncertainty data window Clicking the Tools Compare Threshold uncertainty data submenu item displays the Compare threshold uncer
257. ta Elemental analysis menu item displays the Elemental analysis window shown in Figure 45 The element and reaction are selected from the dropdown lists and the energy elemental cross section and uncertainty are entered in the text boxes The required isotope generally the most abundant is selected by clicking one of the radio buttons to the left of the table and the Get data button is clicked The cross sections for the various isotopes are extracted from the Final database at the specified energy and entered in the third column of the table When all the cross sections have been found then the sum is formed and the k values defined in equation 1 are calculated and displayed in the fourth column In equation 1 the cross sections 67 are the library values while f are the abundances Finally the isotopic cross section value is displayed in the text box k cM 1 j By default the natural abundances are displayed in the second column By clicking on the Enriched radio button it is possible to edit the abundance values to the required values As can be seen from Figure 45 the isotopic value is generally similar to the elemental value but this depends on the actual cross sections and abundances of the isotopes for the selected element User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 34 SAFEPAQ II Eis Elemental analysis BAX Element Si v Abundance Natural Energy 1 4500E 07 eV Enriched Reaction r p I
258. tainty data window shown in Figure 193 This shows reactions where there are differences in the uncertainty data values for threshold reactions The value in External is shown and also an indication of whether it is a new entry or if the Delta value has been changed The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively Compare threshold uncertainty data Reaction P He 3 n d H 2 Li 6 n pJHe 6 Li n 2n Li 5 Li 7 n dHe 5 Be S n 2n Be 8 Be S n d Li 8 Be 3 n t Li B 1 n d Be 3 Delta Delta60 Type 609 reactions 1 00000E 01 1 00000E 01 E dit 1 46000E 01 1 46000E 01 Edit 1 80000E 01 1 80000E 01 Edit 6 66660E 01 6 66660E 01 Edit 5 00000E 02 5 00000E 02 E dit 1 00000E 01 1 00000E 01 E dit 5 00000E 02 5 00000E 02 E dit 2 00000E 01 2 00000E 01 E dit Copy Close Figure 193 The Compare threshold uncertainty data window Clicking the Tools Compare Quality scores submenu item displays the Compare Quality scores window shown in Figure 194 This shows reactions where there are differences in the scores The scores in External and Internal and the number of different reactions are shown Note that if the External database is recent enough so that data on the extended Quality scores for discrepant reactions are present then the extended scores are also shown The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print bu
259. te that it is not possible to change the Graph type the Energy or the Final state The choice of Reaction C T axis CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 137 and Trend type are determined by the type of Analysis chosen in the Cross section analysis and Analysis graph windows Clicking the Plot button displays the Validation plot window shown in Figure 150 The title shows the various options chosen The items on the Options menu are as described for Figure 134 The graph can be printed to the default printer by clicking the File Print menu item and the window can be closed by clicking the File Close menu item Note that if the Cross section analysis window is closed while the other two are still open then they are automatically closed as well Changing the various options in the Cross section analysis window and then clicking the Plot button will typically quickly refresh both the Analysis graph and Reaction details windows if they are open However if a different reaction source or type is chosen then a lengthy collection process will be needed before the graph is redrawn LL Validation plot m File Edit Options Power trend for Max xs v s n 2n reactions NS 811 FS 99 values 370 333 o 296 re 259 o T 222 a m 185 o 148 111 2 74 37 0 oe e 1E 03 1E 02 1E 01 1E 00 1E 01 1E 02 1E 03 C T value Figure 150 Validation plot C T window A new feature for ana
260. ted The page setup details can be altered by clicking the File Page setup menu item to User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 10 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion display the standard Page Setup dialog where page setup details such as margins can be selected The status bar in the main window contains two buttons and a time display at the right hand side These operate a stopwatch that can be used manually or by SAFEPAQ II to show elapsed times of various operations Pressing the Start button will start the timer and change the button caption to Stop Clicking this will stop the clock Clicking Start again will restart the timer The timer can be reset by clicking the Zero button Many calculations start the timer automatically and if the last value is required to be stored for use later this can be done by clicking the File Timer menu item This displays the Timer window shown in Figure 9 The current stored value and description are shown These can be cleared by clicking the Clear button Clicking the Overwrite button will place the current elapsed time and a description entered in the first text box in the store Clicking the Add to button will add the current elapsed time shown on the status bar to the store and put the sum in the store Note that times greater than 24 hours are shown by the number of days Timer Description Calculate multi qroup data Value 0 00 00 Figure 9 The Timer window
261. the Reaction data Documentation menu item displays a submenu with two items Clicking Reaction list generates a list of reactions in a readable form A new feature introduced for EAF 2003 was the flagging of reactions that have changed since the previous EAF library In order to do this it is necessary to have information on the previous library this is obtained from the External database defined for Compare see Figure 175 To check that the correct database is open the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 140 is displayed If the External folder is correct then click the Yes button to continue if not then Click the No button and create a new Compare database see Figure 175 Note that the comparison means that this operation now takes longer about 3 minutes than in previous versions SAFEPAQ II PS 9 The External database must correspond to the previous EAF library z7 Currently External is in I S5afepaq_DotNetiSafepag_2007_newt Is this correct do you wish to continue Note that the comparison with the previous library takes about 3 minutes Figure 140 The confirmation dialog prior to writing the reaction list CCFE Fusion User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 127 For libraries such as the EAF 2007 proton induced one which have no previous version there is the option of producing a simpler form of reaction list If the database compare mdb is not present in the Sa epaq 2 folder then the dialog sho
262. the cross sections at standard energies for the two libraries the ratios and if available the values from experiment The data grid can be printed to the default printer by clicking the Print button The window can be closed from this tab by clicking the Close button or the Close button at the top of the window Note that if the Final summary values for the Internal database have not yet been calculated then a message to this effect is displayed in the window There are many reactions in the EAF libraries and to select a particular one the Find text box can be used Enter a reaction string e g Fe 56 n p and clicking the Find button will User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 166 SAFEPAQ II display data for the selected reaction To display reactions with high mass targets it is necessary to use the paging buttons clicking gt displays the next page and clicking lt displays the previous page id Compare with previous EAF library d im Reaction H lin g H 2 A Source Premods Mods Summary H 2 n 2n H 1 i i H 2 n g H 3 H 3 n 2n H 2 EAF 2007 External H 3 n 3n H 1 There is 1 premod He 3 n g He 4 13 Merge data above 2 00E 07 eV The law is 2 and the number of points is 66 He 3 n p H 3 He 3 n d H 2 He 4in 2n He 3 Li 6 n 2na H 1 Li 6 n n d He 4 Li 6 n qg Li 7 Li 6 n p He 6 Li 6 n t He 4 Li 7 n 2n Li 6 Li n n a H 3 Li 7 n 2na H 2 Li 7 n n p He 6 Li 7 n g Li 8 Li 7 n d He 6
263. the damaged database It is usually possible to repair such damage and return the database to a usable state To do this click on the Tools Repair databases menu item to display the Repair databases window shown in Figure 166 Select the database to be repaired and click the Repair button Note that since moving to VB NET repairing is actually the same as compacting a database User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 148 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion F Repair databases Repair standard databases damaged by a SAFEPAG I crash C Parameter C Master Final C Final add C Library C Cache C EXFOR Dre Figure 166 The Repair databases window As SAFEPAQ II is developed new features are added In most cases this means that the SQL queries in the various databases are either amended or new ones added It follows that 1f an old database is used with the current version of SAFEPAQ II then it can crash because the code calls non existent queries This can be corrected by importing the new or modified queries into the old database There can be many such changes so this process is automated by clicking on the Tools Update databases menu item to display the Update databases window shown in Figure 167 Update databases Database folder Safepaq_DotNet Safepaq_2009_2 Select databases that require updated queries and or fields since 2 0 3434 Parameter Update all the So
264. the energy and cross section data to a new scrap file with name NuclideReaction EXFOR see page 57 for more details of scrap files These keyboard short cuts are displayed in a ToolTip if the cursor is hovered over the data grid By default the Reference information is expanded to make it more readable than the codes used in the EXFOR files If there is an error caused by a reference not being correctly handled then it is possible to switch off the expansion process This is done by clearing the Expand EXFOR refs check box in the Settings window Figure 1 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 39 The number of points in the data set and the number of data sets for the reaction already selected are shown above the data grid In some cases incorrect data are present on the EXFOR CD This is typically due to cross sections or energies having incorrect units Provision is made to store factors for each entry that correct the error EXFOR file 11818 830927 11818001 830927 1USADKE lUSAORL J AP 10 477 60 L W WESTON K K SETH E G BILPUCH H V NEUSON NEUTRON CAPTURE CROSS SECTIONS IN THE KEV REGION PART II SPIN ORBIT COUPLING AND THE OPTICAL MODEL STATUS SCSRS HISTORY 760731T TRANSLATED FROM SCISRS 830927A CONVERTED TO REACTION FORMALISM 0 Figure 52 The EXFOR file window If after viewing it is decided that the data set is required then the Data used for plotting option should be
265. the experimental data and EXFOR points will be displayed Checking the Options Overplot uncertainty band menu item or the fourteenth toolbar button displays an uncertainty band using the uncertainty values shown in Figure 36 and Figure 39 over the main curve The error factors and the source of data are shown in the status bar Note that this option will only work if a single final state and a single source are selected Clicking the Options Overplot group data menu item displays a submenu that shows the twelve options for overplotting group data No group data and the eleven group structures One of these group structures can be selected in the Settings window Default group data type as the group structure that is shown when the fifteenth toolbar button is clicked User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 51 Checking the Options Omit systematic error bars menu item means that the error bars for the systematics displayed when the Options Overplot EXFOR menu item is checked are not displayed This is useful if graphs are required for publication and the large error bars are confusing Checking the Options Draw in black and white menu item means that graphs will be displayed on screen with the lines black but distinguished by various patterns This is useful if graphs are copied to the clipboard for use in other documents that will not be printed in colour Checking the Options Draw lines thick menu item means that graphs w
266. the fit equations are stored in an XML file see Appendix 2 for further details In addition to the trend lines which are fitted to the data points it is possible to define a custom line which can either be a trend line fitted with various options and then saved or a curve defined by the user Clicking the Options Define custom line menu item opens the Custom Line window shown in Figure 147 Choose the form of the equation of the line by clicking one of the three radio buttons and then add the coefficients in one of the text boxes that will have a white background Clicking the Details button will enable information about the curve to be entered in the first textbox the buttons are changed so that it possible only to Store or Cancel these details Alternatively a previously saved curve can be selected from the dropdown list Clicking OK will User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 134 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion display this curve in green on the Analysis graph If the custom line is not required then it can be removed by clicking on the Options Custom Line menu item to remove the check Note that this option is only enabled once a custom line is defined a Custom Line Jog 9 y Power 3 NO Act NO A lt 20 vl 10 1 7208E 00 3 0565E 01 K 1 6560E 02 x 2 3 1800E 02 x3 i exp K x2 Figure 147 The Custom Line window It is possible to exclude various points The Options
267. ther changed using the modifications The time taken to carry out this step depends on the total number of modifications but is typically about 10 minutes The assembling of all reaction data is now complete The next steps are a series of iterations to view check and correct the data to ensure that no further modifications are required Twenty one tests on the data in Final can be carried out The first check is to ensure that no negative cross section data have been produced during the production of Final To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Negative cross sections submenu item this displays the Negative cross sections window shown in Figure 122 To check if there are any reactions with negative cross sections click the Get reactions button this takes about 20 s to check all the data If as required there are no reactions shown then the check is complete If any reactions are shown then select one and click the View data button to open the Reaction data window Figure 70 where the data can be inspected The second test shows if any reactions have zero cross section at high energy To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Missing high energy data submenu item this displays the Missing high energy data window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The third test shows if any reactions have negative energy values To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Negative energie
268. ting source of data are shown in the large list box If the Select previous reaction option is checked and a reaction is selected then when another Target is selected the reaction type now shown in the Select previous reaction text is automatically selected A ToolTip shows the reaction number and the multiplicity of the selected reaction The source of data for a particular reaction can be changed by clicking the Modify button This displays the Modify reaction window shown in Figure 101 inp Reaction list Element Co Ag format Targets Co 55 Co 56 Co 57 Select previous reaction Co 58 C Co 58m v Reaction Some qa Add Co 55 n 4np Fe 51 TALYS 6a Co 55 n a Mn 52 TALYS 6a Modify Co 55 n a Mn 52Zm TALYS 6a Co 55 n d Fe 54 TALYS 6a Co 55 n d2a Ti 46 T LYS 6a Co 55 n da Cr 50 TALYS 6a Co 55 n dh Cr 51 T LYS 6a v n Figure 100 The Reaction list window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 80 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion Modify reaction Target Co 55 Reaction n a Daughter Mn 52 gt gt gO mO nO Total Source TALYS 6d SIGECN MASGAM TALYS 5 TALYS 5a TALYS 6 TALYS 6a WIND Y Multiplicity 2I Modif Modify Multiplicity in Master Modify Multiplicity in Final Figure 101 The Modify reaction window The current source of the selected reaction is displayed and the available data sources are s
269. tion to display a ToolTip containing all the details If there User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 160 SAFEPAQ II CCFE Fusion is more that one modification then pressing the gt or lt keys will display the next or previous modification details The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively Compare number of modifications Reaction NumEst Numlnt 493 reactions gt He3 n d H 2 Li B n p He 6 Li B n t He 4 B 11 n t Be 3 C 12 n p B 12 O 15 n 2n 0 15 Q 17 n p N 17 Q 18 n p N 18 Refresh Copy Print F onrojrojco 4 D 1 D D 3 D D Close Figure 186 The Compare number of modifications window At one point during the development of SAFEPAQ II the Mod type 5 modification only removed data points Now this modification also ensures that a point at 60 MeV exits 20 MeV for a non extended library Prior to this it was necessary to add the 60 or 20 MeV point by means of a Mod type 16 modification When comparing with an External database that used these additional Mod type 16 modifications the list of reactions with different numbers of modifications can be very large Most of these are actually not relevant as the External Mod type 16 is not required to be added to the Internal database The Ignore final Mod type 16 mods check box in the Settings window Figure 1 should be ticked if the
270. tios Oz c ando c remain constant irrespective of whether the number of final states is 2 or 3 The values of these ratios are given in equations 4 and 5 SLT OR emen 4 S 5 o b If Oris the sum of the three final states then the ith 3 state branching ratio is given by equation 6 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 213 Thus for the 1 isomeric state equation 6 can be rewritten in equation 7 p Imn o Tns Pal a tu VO eee Jay lb 70 O Similarly the other two ratios are given in equations 8 and 9 b b b aini mi n 5p gr OAE M 8 gt I bX0 b bs I RT APE RIE ato RUE Ne a Eo g 1 5 b aiding de cata ante teauiaiiiets aetna 9 Note that the sum of equations 7 8 and 9 is 1 as required Thus equation 3 must be replaced by equation 10 User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 214 SAFEPAQ II Appendix 5 Single Resonance Approximation CCFE Fusion If the thermal cross section is large then it is a physically reasonable approximation to assume that the thermal cross section and to some extent the resonance integral are determined by a single strong s wave resonance The single level Breit Wigner SLBW formula can be written as shown in equation 1 FU o IE lem xcu Ld ME 1 k E E 1T where k is the neutron wave number g is a spin statistical weight factor I is the neutron width I
271. to emptying the Cache All the reactions for the selected target and source can be removed from the Cache by clicking the Edit Delete all reactions for target and source menu item no confirmation is necessary prior to removal If summed reactions with MT gt 200 have been produced see later then these can be removed from the Cache by clicking the Edit Delete all MT gt 200 sums for target and source menu item no confirmation is necessary prior to removal It is possible to combine data in the Cache in several ways Firstly if a reaction has more than one final state then the sum I daughter 99 can be formed by clicking the Edit Add sum of isomeric cross sections menu item Secondly if more than one reaction from the same source form the same daughter then these can be added by clicking the Edit Add sum of cross sections for same daughter menu item The exact meaning of this sum is actually more general then the cross section to the same daughter since particle production cross sections are also formed The selected reaction must be n n p n d n p n t n n t n h n n h n a or n n a and one of the sums n d n p n t n d n p n p n t n t n h n h or n atn a is formed Note that because of the first two sums it is not possible to produce n d n d this must be done by using the next menu item Also note that these particle production sums contain only the first two terms of the more general sums suc
272. trum must be stored by clicking the Store Store spectrum menu item the name will then be shown in Figure 87 when this is subsequently opened again The Neutron spectrum window is then closed and another spectrum chosen in Figure 85 Having plotting this clicking the Store Plot store menu item then displays both spectra Plot spectrum Neutrons per group Neutrons per energy interval Neutrons per lethargy Stored spectrum ear Scale factor 1pE 10 Figure 87 The Plot spectrum window User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 69 mi Neutron spectrum File Edit Store Options 1 0E 15 i 1 0E 14 f 1 0E 13 1 0E 12 Neutrons per lethargy interval 1 0E 11 1E 5 1E4 fusion_flux 1E 3 1E EI 1E 0 En ER En En E EG En En Neutron Energy eV Figure 88 The Neutron spectrum window The y axis can be plotted either linearly or logarithmically by clicking Options y axis which displays a submenu with Log and Lin items The axis ranges can be changed by clicking the Options Axis scale menu item which displays the Axis scale window shown in Figure 89 Change the values in the text boxes and then click the Apply button to change the ranges Clicking the Options Thick lines menu item shows the lines as thick lines which makes them more visible if the graph is copied and then pasted into another application Axis scale x minimum 1 0E 05 xXma
273. ttons respectively User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 164 SAFEPAQ II 7 Compare Quality scores Reaction E Score Score EXScore XScore 183 reactions Li 7 n n a H 3 Be S n t Li 7 Be 10 n g Be 11 B 11 n t Be 9 C 12 n t B 10 N 14 n gIN 15 N 14 n t C 12 Q 16 n N 14 guion oo go c n n j N a an oo km co co 0 70 fo MM Mm Ww Mm OINI Figure 194 The Compare Quality scores window Using information from Figure 176 Figure 194 enable changes to be made systematically to the Internal database that take into account the changes made in the External database The ability to view the Log in an External database is sometimes necessary in order to check on what changes have been made This is possible by clicking on the Tools View external Log menu item that displays the Log window shown in Figure 6 In this case the title bar shows Log External and the contents of the External rather than Internal Log are shown A further way to compare with a previous EAF library has been available from EASY 2005 Clicking the Tools Compare with previous EAF library menu item displays the Compare with previous EAF library window shown in Figure 195 Prior to opening the window the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 196 is displayed The Compare with previous EAF library window shows all the reactions in the current library and contains four tabs The Source tab displays the dat
274. uery can be properly defined 3 The definition of the generic mdb database tables Cross section Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Point number Number Long 4 Energy Number Double 8 Cross section Number Double 8 User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 178 SAFEPAQ II Details Name Type Size Name Text 50 Calc summary Yes No 1 Linked Yes No 1 Interpolation Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Range number Number Integer 2 Range limit Number Long 4 Interpolation law Number Integer 2 LibrarySummary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Cross section thermal Number Double 8 Cross section 30keV Number Double 8 Cross section 14MeV Number Double 8 Resonance Integral Number Double 8 Reaction Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 Source Text 50 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 Multiplicity Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 QM Number Double 8 QI Number Double 8 LR Number Integer 2 NR Number Integer 2 NP Number Long 4 Systematics20Summary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Number Long 4 target Number Integer 2 ZA daughter Number Long 4 daughter Number Integer 2 MT Number Integer 2 Cross section 20MeV Number Double 8 Systematics Number Double 8 Systematics30Summary Name Type Size Reaction number Number Long 4 ZA target Num
275. ugh the amount of data is substantial it is possible to write all of it to DVDs which can be used to install the system on other PCs Visualisation of cross section data is a very important part of the evaluation and validation process Data from several sources for a particular reaction can be plotted together and to this plot can be added experimental data either from the internal SAFEPAQ II databases equivalent to the ASCII tables used by SYMPAL or from the EXFOR database As well as viewing on screen options for printing and the production of books of plots can also be selected The decay data can be viewed in a graphical form including the y and X ray lines of each of the radionuclides The decay data viewer shows all decay properties such as half life and decay modes as well as the biological hazards and other subsidiary data used by FISPACT The cross section data from a particular data source usually require modification before incorporation in the final EAF library This is handled by constructing a series of basic modifications which are stored in a database These can be viewed added to and their effects tested prior to using them all to construct the final library This modular approach of User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 3 Processing data Analysing data Logging changes separating the data and the modifications makes checking and quality assurance very efficient The basic steps of
276. urce databases in the Cross section Update data folder with required new queries C All Source databases Figure 167 The Update databases window Click the browse button to display the Open dialog and select one of the databases in the folder containing the SAFEPAQ II databases needing to be updated The folder name is displayed in the text box Depending on the SAFEPAQ II version only some of the databases need to be updated these are shown with the check boxes enabled Select the ones required usually select all possible and click the Update button This adds all the new queries to the selected databases User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 149 Sometimes the various source databases need to be similarly updated This can be done by ticking the All Source databases check box in the lower part of the window Note that even if only the source databases need to be updated it is still necessary to select a database folder ensure that none of the database check boxes are ticked The window is closed by clicking the Close button SAFEPAQ II is primarly designed as a means of producing EAF data libraries in standard text formats such as the modified ENDF format known as the EAF format However for some applications there is a need to be able to write data as XML files Clicking the Tools Write library as XML menu item writes a file containing subsets of the decay and cross section data to a file
277. usion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 43 these are to be plotted then it is necessary to save them as Private EXFOR data The menu item EXFOR Add Private data displays the Add Private data window shown in Figure 62 Enter the target in the first text box select a reaction from the dropdown listbox and enter a lab code use the standard EXFOR codes with the last two digits of the date the codes can be obtained from the EXFOR lab codes window see Figure 64 Next select from one of the standard references see Figure 42 enter the paper title and the authors in the next two text boxes select the final state radio button and then select the file where the cross section data points are held The data must be available in a standard x4s file details of the format of these files are given in Appendix 2 Clicking the Add button will put the data into the EXFOR database in two tables Private Reaction and Private cross section In cases where private data are added incorrectly or become redundant it is possible to remove them by selecting the EXFOR Delete Private data menu item which displays the Delete Private EXFOR data window shown in Figure 63 Select a reaction and click the Delete button to remove it Note that it is also possible to remove standard entries from the EXFOR database by selecting the Standard type radio button in Figure 63 E EXFOR master plot pP Wok File Cross Section b Edit
278. ut the results in various tables in the Parameter database Also systematics data for each reaction are stored in tables in Parameter If summary data already exist then the confirmation dialog shown in Figure 129 is displayed Generating summary data takes about 6 hours SAFEPAQ II 9 FinalSummary contains 66258 reactions Generating the summary will take about 6 hours Delete all reactions From table Figure 129 Confirmation dialog prior to changing summary data Clicking the Reaction data Generate data Generate multi group data submenu item will display the Multi group files window shown in Figure 130 Check the energy groups that need to be calculated if the elapsed time is required then check the Timer option Clicking the Calculate button will start the calculation Since calculating each group structure can take many hours there is a facility for interrupting the calculation While the calculation is running the caption of the second button changes to STOP calculation Clicking this will stop the calculation at the end of the next reaction However the progress of the calculation is stored and the dialog shown in Figure 131 is displayed next time Typical calculation times User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 117 are 69 groups 6h 100 groups 10h 172 groups 14h 175 groups 16h 315 groups 36h 211 groups 15h 351 groups 25h m Multi group files Group type and weighting C WIMS 69 F
279. v Elemental XS 5 0000E 01 1 0000E 01 b Isotopic X5 5 2515E 01 1 0503E 01 b Use Isotope Abun X5 b k Si 28 32 2300 2 4460E 01 1 0503E 00 O Si 29 4 6700 1 3228E 01 5 6802E 01 3 1000 3 5927E 02 1 5427E 01 Figure 45 The Elemental analysis window OOOOOOOO It is possible to plot the experimental data in a similar fashion to what can be done in the Analysis tool Figure 144 but with some additional options Clicking the Experimental data Plot experimental data menu item opens the Plot experimental data window shown in Figure 46 Select the reaction type in the dropdown list choose the x axis value and the energy range of data and select the required check boxes These decide if only data with the Validation flag set or only total summed data are plotted If the Custom energy radio button is selected than two additional text boxes are displayed where the low and high energy limits can be entered Plot experimental data m im Reaction n 2n a Energy amp axis oO Thermal Mass A Number 2 1 20 MeV Asymmetry s gt 20 MeV Custom Only if validation flag set Pim Only total cross sections Figure 46 The Plot experimental data window CCFE Fusion User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 35 Experimental data m File Edit Options 1 20 MeV exp data for n 2n 1E 01 7 E egent Xx 1E 00
280. ve discussion refers to comparing the data in Final or Test with the experimental integral data It is also possible to do the same comparison using data from one of the data sources The choice of source library is made by clicking on the Integral data Select Source library menu item which displays the Select Source library window shown in Figure 99 Select the required source and then click the Select button Select Source library Source library used for C E comparison TALYS 4 TALYS 5 TALYS 5a Select e TALYS 6a Figure 99 The Select Source library window The Integral data Integral C E for Source menu item in the main window is enabled for example if the TALYS 6a source is selected then it reads Integral C E for TALYS 6a Clicking this displays the Integral C E for TALYS 6a window which is identical to Figure 94 except that the name of the data source is shown in the title bar The data for the selected reaction in the source are collapsed with the required neutron spectra Only data for the selected reaction are processed in this way the progress of the generation of the multi group data for the various group structures can be seen in the main window status bar The plotting of graphs for the selected source follows exactly the description given above for data from Final Reaction data CCFE Fusion The next objective of SAFEPAQ II is the processing of reaction data to produc
281. ved systematics Flags 157 Integral data 158 New Integral data 159 Number of pre modifications 159 Number of modifications 160 Pre modifications 161 Modifications 161 EXFOR 162 Private EXFOR 1 62 Uncertainty data 163 Threshold uncertainty data 163 Quality scores 164 1 e Importance summaries 139 0 Reaction statistics 141 Dominant nuclides 142 New See o Edit See o m List entries 151 n New user 152 Edit user 152 0 Person 150 Entry 150 View User manual About SAFEPAQ II User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 175 References 1 RA Forrest FISPACT 2007 User manual UKAEA FUS 534 2007 2 JA Simpson J Ch Sublet and D Nierop SYMPAL User guide UKAEA FUS 356 1997 3 JA Simpson and J Ch Sublet SYMPAL Utilities guide UKAEA FUS 357 1997 4 J Ch Sublet J Kopecky and RA Forrest The European Activation File EAF 99 cross section library UKAEA FUS 408 1998 5 RA Forrest and J Ch Sublet The European Activation File EAF 99 decay data library UKAEA FUS 409 1998 6 RA Forrest and J Ch Sublet The European Activation File EAF 99 biological clearance and transport libraries UKAEA FUS 410 1998 7 RA Forrest and JA Simpson SAFEPAQ User manual UKAEA FUS 355 1997 8 Visual Numerics Inc PV WAVE Foundation and PV WAVE Visual Exploration Documentation Version 6 Boulder C
282. w Clicking the Tools Compare Number of pre modifications submenu item displays the Compare number of pre modifications window shown in Figure 185 This shows reactions where there are differences in the number of pre modifications in the External and Internal databases To discover what the External pre modifications are click on the reaction to display a ToolTip containing all the details If there is more that one pre modification then pressing the gt or lt keys will display the next or previous pre modification details If changes are made to the pre modifications while the window is open then the list can be refreshed by clicking the Refresh button The contents of the grid can be copied or printed by clicking on the Copy or Print buttons respectively amp 8 Compare number of pre modifications Jc E3 NumExt Numlnt 202 reactions He 3 n d H 2 Li B n p He 5 B 11 n t Be 3 C 12 n 2n C 11 C 2 n p B 12 D 17 n p N 17 D 18 n p N 18 Mg 24 n p Na 24g Refresh Copy oOjoejoejioejijoiloijo Figure 185 The Compare number of pre modifications window Clicking the Tools Compare Number of modifications submenu item displays the Compare number of modifications window shown in Figure 186 This shows reactions where there are differences in the number of modifications in the External and Internal databases To discover what the External modifications are click on the reac
283. wever Lines 1 and 2 are not present The settings required in several areas of SAFEPAQ II are stored in XML files since the change to VB NET The folder containing the safepaq exe file also contains a folder settings This contains three files SafepaqProgramSettings xml SafepaqFormSizeAndLocations xml AnalysisTrends xml These files are maintained by SAFEPAQ II and require no direct user interaction Appendix 3 Multi group cross sections Introduction Calculations of multi group cross sections are made exactly in SAFEPAQ II i e by summing the contributions made by all pairs of data points in a particular group The data points and the interpolation law define exactly the form of the cross section in that range and by using one of a small number of weighting functions the contribution can be analytically evaluated Note that it is assumed that the weighting function cannot change between any two points For a particular energy group the definition of group cross section is given in equation 1 where is the weighting function in the group o is the cross section and 4 is the value of the weighting function integrated over the group 1 ue I Eo EME e 1 If there are n data points in the group then it is necessary to add the two additional points that lie on the upper and lower boundaries The cross section values for these are obtained by interpolation Thus the value of the multi group cross section will be
284. wn in Figure 141 is displayed This enables the database to be generated or the reaction list to be produced with no flagging SAFEPAQ II The Compare database must be created using the previous EAF library as the External database Do you wish to use this to compare with previous library Click Yes to do this first before producing the Documentation Click No to continue with a simple list Figure 141 The confirmation dialog if compare mdb is missing The file reaction list contains the source modification history using the Mod types shown in Table 2 the Quality score see Table 4 and the number of data points Clicking Source table generates a table of numbers of reactions with given MT values that are taken from the various sources source table Both these files are located in the Documents folder on the disk shown in the Source database disk text box in the Settings window Figure 1 These can be used in the production of the EAF report Clicking the Reaction data Write EAF files Write EAF XS file submenu item creates the file eat xs in the folder cross section on the Source database disk and Cross section data folder specified in the Settings window Figure 1 this takes about 14 h Note that in order to increase the precision of the energy and cross section values data can be written in the ENDF scientific format The eleven character wide field is written as 0 000000 0 rather than 0 0000 E
285. x Clicking the Close button closes the window 2 Importance summaries Reactions Analysis done with EASY 2003 EASY 2007 Target V v Type Nuclides Reactions Importance Reaction np iv Important reactions 2 Import Daughters 6 50 n p Ti 50 5 ar 42 V 51 n p Ti 51 5 Ca 45 Ca 47 Copy Ca 48 c 47 Ti 5l Close Figure 154 Importance summaries window Reactions Information about the Quality scores and importance of reactions can be obtained by clicking on the Tools FISPACT Reaction statistics menu item which displays the Reaction statistics window shown in Figure 155 Select a Quality score from the Score dropdown list 1 6 and User manual Issue 8 March 2010 SAFEPAQ II 141 various combinations and an Importance from the Importance dropdown list 1 5 and various combinations and the statistics are shown in a Venn diagram Clicking on any of the numbers will show the number with a border and the details of all the relevant reactions in the list box The contents of the list box can be copied to the clipboard or printed to the default printer by clicking the Copy or Print buttons respectively Clicking the Close button closes the window O Reaction statistics m o Score B iv Importance 5 v Number of validated reactions 231 Number of reactions with importance of 5 1380 91 B4738 Reaction QS Imp
286. ximation is shown in Figure 2 The original EAF 2003 data contained a simple 1 v component joined to the model calculation at 1 MeV For TALYS 5a a l v component is joined to the statistical calculation at 3 keV In EAF 2005 the resonance data from the K n y reaction is joined to the TALYS 5a data at 300 keV Eg to give a improved description of the reaction User manuat Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 218 SAFEPAQ II 100D E o Systm E e Sys20 1 0E 01 D e Nzwe7 E O HAM6O E O HAM58 e OTC61 1 0E 02 _ e FRK64_ A HAM62 gt A RIC61 T 1503 F pas F Q 10E0 LE o C O 10E05 L fs E o L 5 1 0E 06 E 1 0E 07 1 0E 08 L 1 0E 09 L coll 1 mnt mm Ii uuml L Lib L cull sunl L 1 uuu Ii nunl L sul L Lib L ruud 1 tity 1 0E 041 0E 031 0E 021 0E 011 0E 00l 0E 01 OE 02l 0E 03 0E 04 0E 05 0E 06 0E 6E 07 Energy eV Final TALYS 5a EAF 2003 0 Figure 2 Data for K n a in EAF 2003 EAF 2005 Final and TALYS 5a In cases where no experimental information is available for either the n y or n p n a reactions the complete TALYS calculation is adopted The n y thermal cross section is estimated from the crude systematic developed in reference 4 References 1 Yu I Popov and F L Shapiro ZETF 40 1610 1961 2 H A J Van der Kamp and H Gruppelaar Documentation RCN 2 evaluation on Co and Co FSR Gr 35 parts 50 51 April 1981
287. ximum 2 0E 07 y minimum 6 7E 11 y maximum 7 0E 14 Figure 89 The Axis scale window Once the multi group cross sections have been calculated the Average XS button in Figure 85 becomes enabled Clicking this once a spectrum is selected will calculate and store the average cross section for each reaction this is the same as the collapsed cross section calculated in FISPACT For an extended enegy library this takes about 20 minutes These can then be compared with experimental integral data User manual Issue 8 March 2010 CCFE Fusion 70 SAFEPAQ II The values of the average cross sections for particular spectra can be seen by clicking on the Integral data Average cross sections menu item in the main window which displays the Average cross sections window shown in Figure 90 Select a target reaction and neutron spectrum in the three list boxes click on the required radio button in the Final state group and then click the Get average to show the average cross section value in the text box ig Average cross sections Target Reaction Spectrum Fe 52 n 2nd fng chromium asc A Fe 54 n 2n 4 fng cucrzr Fe 55 n 3n Ing Dy Fe 56 n n a fng_eurofer asc Fe 5 n n 3a fnq_f82h asc Fe 58 n 2na ng hafnium asc Fe 59 n 3na ng heat Fe 60 n n p fng Mo Co 55 v I n n 2a i ng Re M fey Average cross section b 4 1
288. ys the Data points gt 60 MeV window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption For non extended libraries 20 replaces 60 on the menu item The sixteenth test shows if any reactions have a Q value of zero To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Q value 0 submenu item this displays the Q value 0 window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The seventeenth test actually uses data in Parameter but devived from Final A systematic formula for the total non elastic cross sections is available 10 The sum of the cross sections for all the reactions at 14 5 MeV should agree closely with the non elastic systematic for this energy Any reactions which differ by more than a factor of 2 need further investigation To check this click the Reaction data Test Final for Inconsistent non elastic data at 14 5 MeV sub menu item this displays the Inconsistent non elastic data at 14 5 MeV window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The eighteenth test is identical to the seventeenth except that data at 40 MeV are considered To check click the Reaction data Test Final for Inconsistent non elastic data at 40 0 MeV submenu item this displays the Inconsistent non elastic data at 40 0 MeV window which is identical to Figure 122 except for the caption The nineteenth test shows if any reactions have energies for the first and second data points that are not increasing To check

SAFEPAQ-11: User manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents